After 1694, when Quiroga became Governor, the inhabitants of all the Mariana Islands were moved to Guam or Saipan, except for a few natives who hid out on Rota to escape resettlement. Natives of Tinian Island were finally defeated on Agrigan and moved to Saipan in 1695. A final resettlement took place when Chamorros residing on Saipan were removed to Guam in 1698, leaving only Guam and Rota occupied at the beginning of the 18th century (Underwood, 1973:17, cites Safford, 1901, 1903; Corte, 1870, Fritz 1904).

"On Guam, a native population in the throes of resettlement, having suffered a series of damaging typhoons in 1670 (Ibanez 1886), in 1671 (Corte 1870; Thompson 1946, 1947; Reed 1952) and in 1693 (Thompson 1945; Reed 1952), and engaging in a series of rebellions, would expectably be peculiarly susceptible to disease, whether of introduced or native origins. That population decline began well before the date of the first Spanish census in 1710 seems evident, but the decrease had certainly not proceeded to the level of from 100 to 400 indicated by Dampier, after his visit in 1686, and recorded by Haswell (1917), Safford (1901), and Reed (1952)" (Underwood, 1973:18).

The data in Tables 1.1 and 1.2 show the change in composition of the population on Guam and Rota combined from 1710, the first Spanish census, through 1830. Rota could not be disaggregated from Guam in these tabulations; only a few hundred persons were living on Rota during this period. Immigrants, particularly Filipinos, continued to come to the Mariana Islands throughout the period, but since the censuses seem to classify persons in different ways, the population flows cannot be traced very well. The number of pure Chamorros decreased during the 1700s, and then started a very gradual increase during the early 1800s. While the Native population declined steadily, reaching its lowest point in 1786, the "mestizo" population (the progeny of matings between natives and Spanish, Filipino, and other foreigners) grew during the period.

Table 1.1 Ethnic Distribution: 1710 to 1830

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Spanish/ Fili‑ Offcls/

Date Total Natives Mixed Mestizo pinos Troops Others

1830 6,490 2,652 1,007 5 2,612 70 143

1829 6,480 2,697 1,006 5 2,557 79 136

1828 6,448 2,792 970 2 2,466 78 140

1825 5,901 2,683 3,218 0 0 0 0

1816 5,389 2,559 0 1,109 1,484 147 90

1802 4,149 2,151 0 676 1,156 139 27

1801 4,244 2,142 0 657 1,274 140 31

1800 4,060 2,108 0 542 1,234 139 37

1799 4,001 2,074 0 591 1,164 142 30

1795 3,500 1,894 0 537 898 147 24

1793 3,584 1,766 0 961 710 147 0

1710 3,614 3,143 0 471 0 0 0

_______________________________________________________________________

Notes: Mestizos excluded from Spanish category 1828 to 1830; for 1828

to 1830 census reports, "other" includes English, French,

Mulattos, Malayans, and Pacific Islanders.

Source: Karolle 1978:46‑47 (Karolle cites Underwood 1976: 206, Carano

1964: 199, 323‑324, Statistical Abstract: Guam 1975: 2.

The percent native also fluctuated quite a bit during the period, again, attributable to the classification systems used in the various censuses (Table 1.2). The proportion of Filipinos in the population increased between 1710 and 1801, then remained at about 30 percent for several years. These Filipinos were mainly workers brought from the Philippines to serve the Spanish.

Table 1.2 Percent Ethnic Distribution: 1710 to 1830

Spanish/ Fili‑ Offcls/

Date Total Natives Mixed Mestizo pinos Troops Others

1830 100.0 40.9 15.5 .1 40.2 1.1 2.2

1829 100.0 41.6 15.5 .1 39.5 1.2 2.1

1828 100.0 43.3 15.0 .0 38.2 1.2 2.2

1825 100.0 45.5 54.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

1816 100.0 47.5 0.0 20.6 27.5 2.7 1.7

1802 100.0 51.8 0.0 16.3 27.9 3.4 .7

1801 100.0 50.5 0.0 15.5 30.0 3.3 .7

1800 100.0 51.9 0.0 13.3 30.4 3.4 .9

1799 100.0 51.8 0.0 14.8 29.1 3.5 .8

1797 100.0 37.2 0.0 20.4 0.0 4.8 37.6

1795 100.0 54.1 0.0 15.3 25.7 4.2 .7

1793 100.0 49.3 0.0 26.8 19.8 4.1 0.0

1710 100.0 87.0 0.0 13.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

________________________________________________________________________

Notes: See Notes to Table 1.1

Source: Karolle 1978:46‑47 (Karolle cites Underwood 1976: 206, Carano

1964: 199, 323‑324, Statistical Abstract: Guam 1975: 2.

Between 1800 and about 1856, the population nearly tripled, reaching more than 8,000 before a devastating smallpox epidemic in 1856 reduced the number by about half (Table 1.3). For the rest of the century the population gradually recovered, although a large part of this latter increase was due to migration of Carolinians, brought as a part of a Spanish policy of repopulating the Marianas. Also, a number of people migrated from the Philippines.

The rate of natural growth must have been very high, because epidemics continued, and yet the population increased. Safford (1901) has noted that an epidemic killed 194 persons on Guam in January, 1849. An epidemic of whooping cough reportedly resulted in the deaths of at least 200 children in 1855 (Fritz 1904). And two epidemics swept through the survivors of the smallpox epidemic in 1856 ‑ a measles epidemic in which at least 50 died in 1861, while another epidemic of whooping cough caused the deaths of 100 children in Agana, alone, in 1898 (Fritz 1904 from Underwood, 1973:23).

"Prior to the time of the decimating smallpox epidemic in 1856, immigration to the Mariana Islands had been minimal, especially in contrast to the rate of population movement into the area which took place after that date. A small Carolinian colony was established on Guam in 1816... This nucleus of Carolinian settlement was augmented somewhat following the great earthquake and tidal wave which apparently hit many Carolinian islands, as well as Guam, in 1849, leading survivors of the calamity to flee their ravaged atoll homes and seek refuge elsewhere in Micronesia...the Mariana Islands were not used extensively as a penal colony prior to the 1870s" (Underwood 1973:23).

Table 1.3 Population by Village and Region: 1831 to 1897

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Village 1897 1891 1886 1872 1871 1849 1832 1831

Guam...................8,698 8,369 8,144 6,248 6,276 7,940 6,310 6,049

North.......................6,324 6,153 5,949 4,972 5,251 6,452 5,065 4,831

Agana.....................5,198 (NA) 4,959 (NA) (NA) 5,620 4,362 4,137

Other North...............1,126 (NA) 990 (NA) (NA) 832 703 694

Anigua.................. (NA) (NA) 169 (NA) (NA) 217 246 234

Asan.................... (NA) (NA) 252 (NA) (NA) 190 155 158

Tepungan................ (NA) (NA) 234 (NA) (NA) 73 57 56

Sinajana................ (NA) (NA) 142 (NA) (NA) 250 177 172

Maria Cristina.......... (NA) (NA) 193 (NA) (NA) (NA) (NA) (NA)

Mongmong................ (NA) (NA) (NA) (NA) (NA) 102 68 74

South.......................2,374 2,243 2,195 1,276 1,025 1,488 1,245 1,218

Agat‑Sumay................1,325 1,151 1,141 641 553 287 218 222

Umatac‑Merizo............. 788 679 664 379 316 582 539 501

Umatac.................. (NA) (NA) 225 (NA) 127 224 220 206

Merizo.................. (NA) (NA) 439 (NA) 189 358 319 295

Inarajan.................. 261 413 390 256 156 346 244 246

Pago...................... (NA) (NA) (NA) (NA) (NA) 273 244 249

__________ ________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood 1973:27; 1831 and 1832 from Safford (1901); 1849 from Cox

(1917); 1871 from Corte (1875); 1872 from Ibanez (1886); 1886 from

Noticias (1886); 1891 from Resumen (1891), 1897 Census.

The number and the variety of the immigrants increased after 1856. As many as 63 Chinese laborers arrived from Manila aboard the Spanish vessel Denia in 1858 (Safford 1901); and an additional 39 Chinese may have arrived during the 1860s (Fritz 1904). About 35 Japanese agricultural laborers arrived in the Mariana Islands in 1867.

Between 1865 and 1869, over 1,000 Carolinians came to the Mariana Islands, in part to develop the copra industry in the area. An earlier complement of some 600 Carolinians were brought to Guam on labor contracts about 1861 (Beers, 1954), and by 1868, when an additional 95 Carolinians were brought to Guam, a total of 430 Carolinians were listed as resident in the community around what is now Tamuning (Ibanez 1886).

Table 1.3 and 1.4 show village distributions during the 1800s. Since the various sources did not collect data in comparable manners, Underwood (1973) made broad categories which are repeated here.

The population of Guam increased until the 1856 epidemic, and then decreased suddenly. There were also shifts between the North and the South, with increased percentages living in the North until 1871, and then a drifting away from the North to the Southern villages. Immigration could explain some of these differences, of course, particularly the movements of the large numbers of Carolinians. The Agana area continued to have the majority of the population throughout the period.

Table 1.4. Percent Population by Village and Region: 1831 to 1897

Village 1897 1891 1886 1872 1871 1849 1832 1831

Guam.................. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

North...................... 72.7 73.3 73.0 79.6 83.7 81.3 80.3 79.9

Agana.................... 59.8 NA 60.9 NA NA 70.8 69.1 68.4

Other North.............. 12.9 NA 12.2 NA NA 10.5 11.1 11.5

Anigua................. NA NA 2.1 NA NA 2.7 3.9 3.9

Asan................... NA NA 3.1 NA NA 2.4 2.5 2.6

Tepungan............... NA NA 2.9 NA NA .9 .9 .9

Sinajana............... NA NA 1.7 NA NA 3.1 2.8 2.8

Maria Cristina......... NA NA 2.4 NA NA NA NA NA

Mongmong............... 1.2 1.1 1.3 NA NA 1.3 1.1 1.2

South...................... 27.3 26.7 27.0 20.4 16.3 18.7 19.7 20.1

Agat‑Sumay............... 15.2 13.7 14.0 10.3 8.8 3.6 3.5 3.7

Umatac‑Merizo............ 9.1 8.1 8.2 6.1 5.0 7.3 8.5 8.3

Umatac................. NA NA 2.8 NA 2.0 2.8 3.5 3.4

Merizo................. NA NA 5.4 NA 3.0 4.5 5.1 4.9

Inarajan................. 3.0 4.9 4.8 4.1 3.9 4.4 3.9 4.1

Pago..................... NA NA NA NA NA 3.4 3.9 4.1

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood 1973: 27; 1831 and 1832 from Safford (1901); 1849 from

Cox (1917); 1871 from Corte (1875); 1872 from Ibanez (1886);

1886 from Noticias (1886); 1891 from Resumen (1891), 1897 Census

The first full census which was tabulated by age and sex as well as some other characteristics was taken in 1897 (Table 1.5 and Figure 1.1). The results of the census show a slight surplus of females, and a generally youthful population; the median age for Chamorros on Guam was 21.0 years, with 19.9 for males and 21.9 for females. In her work, Underwood (1987) compared the census results with other data she collected, and adjusted the 1897 census counts to make them more accurate. Her adjusted census distributions are also shown in Table 1.5.

Table 1.5. Population by Age and Sex: 1897

Spanish Census Adjusted by Use of Vital Records

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group Total Males Females Total Males Females

Total.. 8,698 4,137 4,561 9,353 4,409 4,944

Perc. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

0 to 4 14.8 15.6 14.0 15.2 15.9 14.5

5 to 9 12.8 14.2 11.5 12.8 14.1 11.6

10 to 14 10.3 10.6 10.0 10.3 10.6 10.1

15 to 19 10.0 9.8 10.1 9.8 9.6 10.1

20 to 24 10.8 10.3 11.2 10.8 10.5 11.0

25 to 29 9.6 9.2 10.0 9.6 9.3 9.9

30 to 34 7.6 7.4 7.8 7.5 7.3 7.6

35 to 39 4.9 5.2 4.6 5.0 4.9 5.0

40 to 44 3.4 3.2 3.5 3.4 3.2 3.5

45 to 49 3.6 3.0 4.0 3.7 3.1 4.1

50 to 54 3.6 2.9 4.3 3.6 3.1 4.1

55 to 59 3.0 2.5 3.4 3.0 2.7 3.3

60 to 64 2.8 2.8 2.7 2.7 2.6 2.7

65 to 69 1.6 1.7 1.4 1.6 1.8 1.4

70 to 74 .8 .9 .8 .9 1.0 .8

75 + .4 .5 .4 .4 .4 .4

Unknown .1 .1 .1 ... ... ...

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood, 1987: 14‑15

Figure 1.1 Age and Sex Distribution: 1897

The census results for 1897 by village show that the South was more youthful than the North (Table 1.6). The median ages of the Southern villages were anywhere from 1 to 2 years lower than those for the Northern villages: 18.6 for Merizo, 19.1 for Agat, and 19.9 for Inarajan, compared to 21.7 for Agana and 21.9 for Agana‑Adjacent.

Table 1.6. Population of Villages by Age: 1897

Age Group Total Agana Agana‑Adj Agat Merizo Inarajan

Total. 8,698 5,198 1,126 1,325 788 261

Perc. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

0 to 4 14.8 13.7 13.5 17.4 18.3 18.4

5 to 9 12.8 12.7 11.9 14.5 11.2 13.8

10 to 14 10.3 10.0 10.9 10.3 11.8 8.8

15 to 19 10.0 9.9 9.6 9.4 11.9 9.2

20 to 24 10.8 10.8 10.9 9.8 12.1 11.1

25 to 29 9.6 9.0 10.1 11.4 9.5 10.3

30 to 34 7.6 7.8 7.5 7.8 6.5 6.5

35 to 39 4.9 5.0 5.3 4.5 4.6 4.2

40 to 44 3.4 3.8 3.1 2.5 2.8 3.1

45 to 49 3.6 4.0 4.3 2.4 1.3 3.8

50 to 54 3.6 3.9 5.0 2.8 2.4 1.5

55 to 59 3.0 3.2 2.0 2.7 2.7 5.0

60 to 64 2.8 2.9 2.8 2.0 3.8 1.1

65 to 69 1.6 1.6 2.2 1.3 .8 .8

70 to 74 .8 1.1 .4 .8 .3 .4

75 + .4 .5 .4 .4 .1 .8

Unknown .1 .1 .1 0.0 .1 1.1

Median 21.0 21.7 21.9 19.1 18.6 19.9

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood, 1973: 28

There were 91 males for every 100 females on Guam in 1897 (Table 1.7). Except for the youngest ages, and the 35 to 39 years olds, there tended to be more females than males at each of the age groups. The other important exception occurred for persons 65 years and over in which the males predominated, especially in the village of Merizo; it is unclear whether this is a case of age‑misreporting or real.

Table 1.7. Males per 100 Females by Age: 1897

Age Group Total Agana Agana‑Adj Agat Merizo Inarajan

Total 90.7 91.6 85.8 90.9 89.9 96.2

0 to 4 100.8 108.8 108.2 90.9 80.0 84.6

5 to 9 111.6 111.9 112.7 111.0 109.5 111.8

10 to 14 95.9 108.0 61.8 78.9 111.4 109.1

15 to 19 87.9 91.4 96.4 89.4 56.7 118.2

20 to 24 83.2 75.3 86.4 97.0 115.9 81.2

25 to 29 84.0 78.0 90.0 101.3 70.5 125.0

30 to 34 86.5 86.2 73.5 63.5 168.4 183.3

35 to 39 100.9 103.1 114.3 96.7 80.0 83.3

40 to 44 84.3 97.0 59.1 57.1 100.0 33.3

45 to 49 68.9 63.3 65.5 113.3 100.0 66.7

50 to 54 60.1 64.8 51.4 42.3 90.0 33.3

55 to 59 67.7 63.7 64.3 100.0 61.5 62.5

60 to 64 94.4 105.5 93.8 92.9 50.0 200.0

65 to 69 104.5 107.3 66.7 112.5 500.0 100.0

70 to 74 108.6 96.4 100.0 266.7 100.0 0.0

75 + 116.7 80.0 300.0 400.0 ... 100.0

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood, 1973: 28

AMERICAN PERIOD

At the end of the Spanish‑American War, Guam became a territory of the United States. Censuses were taken by the Naval governor in 1901 and 1910. Guam was not included in the decennial census until 1920.

In working with her reconstructed data set, Underwood produced an estimated census for 1918, just prior to the flu epidemic which killed many people on Guam (Table 1.8 and Figure 1.2). By 1918, according to her figures, there were still more females than males, but the population had grown considerably, partly because of increased medical attention provided by the U.S. Naval Administration. The population remained youthful, with the median age for the total being 18.5 years: 17.4 years for males and 19.4 years for females.

Table 1.8. Estimated Population by Age and Sex: 1918

Numbers Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group Total Males Females Total Males Females

Total........... 15,000 7,134 7,866 100.0 100.0 100.0

Under 5 years........ 2,216 1,112 1,104 14.8 15.6 14.0

5 to 9 years......... 1,915 1,010 905 12.8 14.2 11.5

10 to 14 years....... 1,547 757 790 10.3 10.6 10.0

15 to 19 years....... 1,494 699 795 10.0 9.8 10.1

20 to 24 years....... 1,618 735 883 10.8 10.3 11.2

25 to 29 years....... 1,444 659 785 9.6 9.2 10.0

30 to 34 years....... 1,141 529 612 7.6 7.4 7.8

35 to 39 years....... 735 369 366 4.9 5.2 4.7

40 to 44 years....... 506 231 275 3.4 3.2 3.5

45 to 49 years....... 533 218 315 3.6 3.1 4.0

50 to 54 years....... 546 205 341 3.6 2.9 4.3

55 to 59 years....... 448 181 267 3.0 2.5 3.4

60 to 64 years....... 416 202 214 2.8 2.8 2.7

65 to 69 years....... 233 119 114 1.6 1.7 1.4

70 to 74 years....... 127 66 61 .8 .9 .8

75 years and over.... 67 36 31 .4 .5 .4

Unknown.............. 14 6 8 .1 .1 .1

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood 1983: 3

Figure 1.2 Age and Sex Distribution: 1918

The population increased from under 10,000 when the U.S. Naval Administration began, to almost 15,000 in 1920. Guam has been included in each of the succeeding decennial censuses after 1920, although with a different questionnaire from that used Stateside, and with different processing.

The percentage of natives (meaning Chamorro) decreased from almost 100 percent to 91 percent in 1930, partly because of the varying numbers of naval personnel on island. There were very few other immigrants (unless these were included in the "native" totals). As we will see in later chapters, the proportions changed drastically after World War II when Guam suddenly became strategically important.

Table 1.9. Population by Ethnicity: 1901 to 1940

Ethnicity 1940 1935 1930 1925 1920 1915 1910 1901

Total......... 23,067 20,899 19,139 16,648 14,724 13,689 11,953 9,676

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Natives............ 93.2 93.1 91.1 91.6 93.0 94.7 97.2 99.5

Non‑natives........ 6.8 6.9 8.9 8.4 7.0 5.3 2.8 0.5

Naval personnel.. 3.4 3.3 5.0 5.2 3.2 (NA) 1.0 0.0

Others........... 3.4 3.6 3.9 3.3 3.7 (NA) 1.8 0.5

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Thompson 1941:32; Thompson cites Annual Reports of the Governor

of Guam.

THE DECENNIAL CENSUSES ‑ 1920 TO 1970

Beginning in 1920, Guam was included in the population part of the Decennial Census and in 1960 for the Housing census. In the later chapters we will include comparable data from those censuses whenever appropriate in an effort to show population and housing trends over time.

THE 1980 DECENNIAL CENSUS OF POPULATION AND HOUSING

The 1980 decennial census was conducted in conjunction with the 1980 census of the United States. The questionnaire was developed at the Census Bureau but was reviewed by participants from the Pacific Islands areas in May, 1979, at a Pacific‑areas conference in Honolulu.

The questionnaire was similar to that used in the States, and was modified to account for different conditions on Guam. Unlike in the States, all housing data was collected for all housing units, and all persons responded to all questions. Also, the census was collected through direct interview. Enumerators visited and listed every housing unit, asking the questions as worded in the questionnaire (or translating into the native language, if necessary), and recording the answers. A single questionnaire was used, which contained all the questions asked of every person and household.

Special questionnaires were used for the enumeration of persons in group quarters such as the hospital, the prison, dormitories at the University of Guam, etc. These forms contained the same population questions that appeared on the regular questionnaire but did not include any housing questions.

Responses were determined by the questionnaire and the instructions given to the enumerator; these instructions had been adapted from instructions used Stateside, but were modified to account for the differences on Guam from those found in the States. The definitions and explanations for each subject are included in the discussions of these subjects in the later chapters of this monograph, and are drawn largely from various technical materials and procedures used in the data collection.

Facsimiles of the questionnaire pages containing the population and housing questions used to produce this report are presented in Appendix A.

GENERAL ENUMERATION PROCEDURES

Usual Place of Residence. In accordance with census practice, each person enumerated in the 1980 census was counted as an inhabitant of his or her "usual place of residence", which was generally construed to mean the place where the person lived and slept most of the time. This place was not necessarily the same as the person's legal residence or voting residence. In the vast majority of cases, however, the use of these different bases of classification would produce substantially the same statistics, although there might be appreciable differences for a few areas.

The implementation of this practice resulted in the establishment of residence rules for certain categories of persons whose usual place of residence was not immediately apparent. Therefore, persons were not always counted as residents of the place where they happened to be staying on Census Day. Persons without a usual place of residence, or persons with no one at their usual place of residence to report them to a census taker, however, were counted where they happened to be staying.

U.S. Armed Forces. Members of the United States Armed Forces living on a military installation were counted, as in previous censuses, as residents of the area in which the installation was located; members of the U.S. Armed Forces not living on a military installation were counted as residents of the areas in which they were living. Persons in families with U.S. Armed Forces personnel were counted where they were living on Census Day (i.e., the military installation or "off base", as the case might be).

Each U.S. Navy ship was attributed to the geographic area that the Department of the Navy designated as its homeport.

Crews of Merchant Vessels were enumerated at the port where they were berthed (if they were berthed), excluding those not flying a U.S. flag.

Persons away at school, if college students, were counted as residents of the area in which they were living while attending college. However, children in boarding schools below the college level were counted at their parental home.

Persons at institutions were counted as residents of the area where the institution was located. Patients in short‑term wards of general hospitals were counted at their usual place of residence; if they had no usual place of residence or there was no one at their usual place of residence to report them, they were counted at the hospital.

Persons away from their residence on Census Day at hotels, motels, etc., on the night of March 31, 1980, having their usual home on Guam and who indicated that no one was at home to report them in the census would be enumerated as residents of the hotel, motel, etc. Information on persons away from their usual place of residence who indicated that someone was at home to report them was obtained from other members of their families, resident managers, neighbors, etc. If an entire household was away during the whole period of the enumeration, information on that household was obtained from neighbors.

Residents Abroad. Residents who were abroad for an extended period (in the U.S. Armed Forces, working at civilian jobs, studying at universities outside Guam, etc.) were not included in the population of Guam. On the other hand, residents who were temporarily abroad on vacations, business trips, and the like, were counted at their usual residence on Guam.

Persons from Other Areas having their usual residence (legally or illegally) on Guam on Census Day, including those working here and those attending school (but not living at a chancellery or consulate), were included in the enumeration, as were members of their families with them, regardless of citizenship. However, persons from other areas, temporarily visiting or traveling on Guam, were not enumerated in the 1980 census.

DATA COLLECTION PROCEDURES

The 1980 Census of Guam was conducted through direct interview. Beginning on Census Day, April 1, 1980, enumerators visited and listed every household asking the questions as worded on the questionnaire, and recording the answers. A single questionnaire was used, which contained all the questions asked of every person and household.

Special questionnaires were used for the enumeration of persons in group quarters such as colleges and universities, hospitals, and prisons. These forms contained the same population questions that appeared on the regular questionnaire but did not include any housing questions.

PROCESSING PROCEDURES

The 1980 census questionnaires were processed in a manner similar to that for the 1970 census. They were designed to be processed electronically by the Film Optical Sensing Device for Input into Computer (FOSDIC). For most items on the questionnaire, the information obtained by the enumerator was recorded by marking the answers in the predesignated positions that would be "read" by FOSDIC from a microfilm copy of the questionnaire and transferred onto computer tape with no intervening manual processing. The computer tape excluded information on individual names and addresses.

The tape containing the information from the questionnaires was processed on the Census Bureau's computers through a number of editing and tabulating steps. Among the products of this operation were computer tapes from which the tables in the reports were prepared on phototypesetting equipment at the Government Printing Office.

SOURCES OF ERROR

Since the 1980 population and housing data for Guam were tabulated from entries for all persons and housing units on all questionnaires, these data were not subject to sampling error. In any large‑scale statistical operation such as a decennial census, however, human and mechanical errors occur. These errors are commonly referred to as nonsampling errors. Such errors include failure to enumerate every housing unit or person in the population, not obtaining all required information from respondents, obtaining incorrect or inconsistent information, and recording information incorrectly. Errors can also occur during the field review of the enumerator's work, the clerical handling of the census questionnaires, or the electronic processing of the questionnaires. Quality control and review measures were used throughout the data collection and processing phases of the 1980 census to minimize undercoverage of the population and housing units and to keep errors at a minimum.

EDITING OF UNACCEPTABLE DATA

The objective of the processing operation was to produce a set of statistics that described the population and housing as accurately and clearly as possible.

In the field, questionnaires were reviewed for omissions and certain inconsistencies by a census clerk or an enumerator and, if necessary, a followup was made to obtain missing information. In addition, a similar review of questionnaires was done in the central processing office. As a rule, however, editing was performed by hand only when it could not be done effectively by machine.

There are two means by which incomplete or inconsistent data on the questionnaires were corrected during the editing process: allocation and substitution. Allocations or assignments of acceptable codes in place of unacceptable entries, were needed most often when there was no entry for a given item or when the information reported for a person on that item was inconsistent with other information for the person. As in previous censuses, the general procedure for changing unacceptable entries was to assign an entry for a person that was consistent with entries for other persons with similar characteristics. The assignment of acceptable codes in place of blanks or unacceptable entries enhanced the usefulness of the data. The allocation technique for unknown age illustrates the process:

1. The computer stored ages of persons by selected characteristics, including sex, relationship, marital status, and characteristics of other household members.

2. Each stored age was retained in the computer only until a succeeding person having the same set of characteristics and having age reported was processed through the computer during the electronic edit operation. Then the reported age entry of the succeeding person was stored in place of the one previously stored.

3. When the age of the person was not reported, or the entry was unacceptable, the age assigned to this person was that which was stored for the last person who otherwise had the same set of characteristics.

The 1980 census data on the economic questions such as industry, occupation, class of worker, work experience, and income were processed using an allocation system which assigned values to missing entries in these questions, as necessary, from a single respondent with similar socioeconomic characteristics.

Three population and two housing reports were published after the 1980 census. These were:

PC80‑1‑A54 Number of Inhabitants

PC80‑1‑B54 General Population Characteristics

PC80‑1‑C/D54 Detailed Social and Economic Characteristics

HC80‑1‑A54 General Housing Characteristics

HC80‑1‑B54 Detailed Housing Characteristics

In addition to the printed reports, results of the 1980 census also were provided on computer tape in the form of summary tape files (STFs). These data products were designed to provide statistics with greater subject and geographic detail than was feasible or desirable to provide in printed reports. The STF data were made available at nominal cost. Because of likelihood of incompatible computer systems, the STF data were also provided on microfiche. Recently, the data have also been provided on floppy diskettes which can be read on IBM‑PC compatible equipment.

STF 1 provides population and housing data summarized for Guam as a whole, for election districts, for census designated places (villages), and for enumeration districts. The data include those shown in PC80‑1‑A54, PC80‑1‑B54, and HC80‑1‑A54. STF 3 contains data on various population and housing subjects such as education, employment, and income. The areas covered are the same as STF 1.

GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION

The geographic distribution of Guam's inhabitants has been transformed since pre‑contact times, when the Chamorro population lived in small hamlets located both along the coast and in the interior. Early historical accounts relate that along the coast, these hamlets consisted of approximately 50 to 150 huts, while the interior hamlets were smaller, of from 6 to 20 huts (Carano and Sanchez, 1964). By 1681, the Spanish‑Chamorro wars had resulted in the destruction of the smaller villages and the forced relocation of the native people into a few large villages, where the Spanish could control the population.

The Spanish established the government in Agana because of its long history as the political and cultural center of Guam. In order to facilitate the affairs of government outside Agana, Spanish authorities divided Guam into municipalities. Each municipality consisted of several villages or pueblos and was under the charge of a native magistrate called a "gobernadorcillo" ("little governor"). This system of municipal government continued under the American authorities after 1898. The gobernadorcillo was renamed as commissioner, and a deputy commissioner position was instituted to assist the commissioner.

Municipalities thus became the primary divisions of Guam for census reporting. By the 1920 Census, Guam had 8 separate municipalities, as shown in Figure 1.3. These municipalities were Agana, Asan, Piti, Sumay, Yona, Agat, Inarajan and Merizo. U.S. naval station personnel were not counted as residents of Guam, but were included in the continental United States. The 1920 census report shows population data for each municipality and for rural sections outside of Agana City.

The reporting of 1930 census data was similar to that of 1920 except that, in 1930, persons on naval reservations, including U.S. ships stationed on Guam, were counted as residents of Guam. These results were not included in the population of any municipality, but were compiled separately. A greater portion of this naval population should, according to the 1930 census report, have been assigned to the city of Agana, but the exact location of these reservations could not be determined from the information given by the enumerators on the census schedules.

Substantial reorganization of the municipalities occurred in 1931 in preparation for Guam's first elected Congress and first elected commissioner system. Executive Order 53 set forth the divisions of the old municipality of Agana into the municipalities of Agana, Barrigada, Dededo, and Yigo, and further subdivided the municipality of Barrigada into Barrigada and Sinajana districts, and Dededo into Dededo and Machanao districts. In addition, Merizo was subdivided into Merizo and Umatac districts, and Inarajan was subdivided into Inarajan and Talofofo districts. Reorganization thus created 7 new municipalities and districts for a total of 15 (See Figure 1.4).

The Second Guam Congress was the first elected Congress in the Territory, with the population counts of the 1930 census used for apportionment.

The 1940 census presented total counts for all 15 municipalities and districts, as well as for over 100 towns, barrios and districts within the municipalities. Military personnel were included within the municipality, district, or town where the military facility was located, and U.S. naval ships were listed separately as a portion of Sumay. During World War II, most of the towns and cities (including Agana city) were totally destroyed or severely damaged. In the reconstruction process, many of the communities were relocated and the division of municipalities into barrios was abandoned. There was also some reorganization of the municipalities of Agana and Sinajana in 1947, as part of Agana was annexed to Sinajana (Figure 1.5).

The 1950 census reported data for the 15 municipalities existing in 1940 and for 20 villages or cities existing as minor subdivisions within the municipalities. For the first time, census reports made no mention of the presence of military quarters, even though Guam's population had more than doubled between 1940 and 1950, almost exclusively as the result of post‑war military activities.

One of the provisions of the Organic Act of 1950 caused the organization, authority, and responsibilities of the commissioner system to continue to follow the pattern outlined in Guam Congress Bill No. 16, passed in 1948. However, between 1950 and 1960, Guam's municipalities again underwent extensive reorganization. A local law was enacted to establish the election district boundaries for the purpose of electing the district commissioners, creating 6 new districts and eliminating 2.

Figure 1.3 Guam, 1920 and 1930

Figure 1.4 Guam 1940

Figure 1.5 Guam, 1950

Figure 1.6 Guam, 1960

Figure 1.7 Guam, 1970

Figure 1.8 Guam, 1980

The 1960 census results were for 19 election districts (Figure 1.6). These districts included the 6 newly created municipalities of Tamuning, Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite, Mangilao, Chalan Pago‑Ordot, Agana Heights, and Santa Rita. Because Sumay and Machanao were claimed by the military and ceased to require elected representation by commissioner, they were incorporated into the boundaries of other districts. Sumay was annexed into Santa Rita, and Machanao into Dededo and Yigo. 1970 and 1980 election district boundaries remained the same as the boundaries used in 1960, so census data for those three periods are comparable (Figures 1.7 and 1.8).

Beginning in 1960, the Census Bureau began using a new term, that of "Place", and later "Census Designated Place" to define generally closely settled centers of population without corporate limits. A Place with a population of 2,500 or more is considered urban, and the remaining areas are rural. Places in 1960, 1970, and 1980 are comparable; in 1980, new Places were added in addition to the ones used previously. Although the definition of Place remained the same, the interpretation and application of that definition allowed the addition of military housing areas in 1980 that were not allowed in 1970. Therefore, the expansion of urban areas between 1970 and 1980 was partially the result of including military housing in 1980.

POPULATION DISTRIBUTION BY BROAD GEOGRAPHIC AREA

Although election district boundaries have been altered considerably between 1920 to 1980, the broad areas of Northern, Central, and Southern Guam have remained intact (See Figures 1.3 through 1.8). For the purpose of data analysis, comparability by geographic area over time can be maintained between 1940 and 1980 within these three broad areas. The major disadvantage to this system is the inclusion in the South of the district of Santa Rita, which contains a single large government quarters area that distorts some of the data. Beginning with 1960, the North consisted of Dededo, Tamuning and Yigo. Central Guam consisted of Agana, Agana Heights, Asan, Barrigada, Chalan Pago/Ordot, Mangilao, Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite, Piti and Sinajana. The South was composed of Agat, Inarajan, Merizo, Santa Rita, Talofofo, Umatac and Yona.

Prior to World War II, 63 percent of the population was concentrated in Central Guam, primarily in the capital city of Agana; 29 percent lived in the South; and only 8 percent resided in the North. While population increases occurred in each of the three regions between 1940 and 1980, the vast majority of the growth took place in the Northern portion of the island (Table 1.10)

Table 1.10 Distribution by Region on Guam: 1940 to 1980

Numbers Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Region 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

Total.. 105,979 84,996 67,044 59,498 22,290 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

North.... 47,583 32,540 18,752 16,147 1,795 44.9 38.3 28.0 27.1 8.1

Central.. 34,526 31,266 25,479 26,495 13,946 32.6 36.8 38.0 44.5 62.6

South.... 23,870 21,190 22,813 16,856 6,549 22.5 24.9 34.0 28.3 29.4

___________________________________________________________________________

Note: See text for inclusion of election districts in regions.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

The proportion of persons living in the North increased steadily from 8 percent in 1940 to 45 percent in 1980, with the Northern population growing by 45,788 persons over the 40 year period. Central Guam showed substantial and steady population growth during the same period, increasing by 20,580 persons; however, the proportion of the population living there declined from 63 percent to 33 percent. In contrast, Guam's Southern area did not show steady growth during the same period. The population of the South grew by 16,264 persons between 1940 and 1960, declined by 1,623 persons during the 1960s, and recovered 2,680 persons during the 1970s. By 1980, the proportion of persons residing in the South dropped to 23 percent.

One of the causes for these changes in population distribution was the occupation of the island by the Japanese armed forces during World War II and the continued presence of the United States military after Guam's recapture. World War II had a profound impact on the relocation of the civilian population out of established communities and into areas that were either more convenient to the occupying forces or that were safer for the inhabitants. War activities caused certain villages to cease to be inhabited by civilians, including most of Machanao in the North and Sumay in the South. The village of Agana in Central Guam became nearly deserted.

Another cause for the changes in population distribution was Guam's increased strategic value to the United States during and following World War II. In 1944, Guam became the only location in the Western Pacific large enough to hold major U.S. military bases and to be completely under American control when the Philippines gained independence from the United States. As a result, the Navy and Air Force built large military installations on Guam, seizing over one‑third of the island's land and water in the process.

Military personnel and their dependents were concentrated into densely settled areas on and near bases, which were primarily in the Northern and Central portions of the island, without regard to the location of established local communities. Because base areas and government quarters areas targeted by the military government for the development of infrastructure, and also because civil service jobs on bases were available to the civilian community, the Northern and Central portions of the island attracted migration by the resident population and new residents.

The location of military facilities was determined largely by Guam's geography. The flat limestone plateau of the North became the location of Andersen Air Force Base; Guam's natural deep water port became the center of regional Naval activities; and an airport site in Central Guam already under construction by the Japanese became the Naval Air Station and the civilian air terminal. Southern Guam, with its steep central spine of mountains, was unsuitable for most military activities other than a Naval magazine and watershed. These remain vast, but underdeveloped, holdings.

GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION BY ELECTION DISTRICT

There were considerable variations in population growth between the individual election districts of Guam within the regions. Although the total population of the island increased by almost 25 percent between 1970 and 1980, 3 districts more than doubled in population, while several others lost population. Table 1.11 shows growth of each election district from 1960 to 1980. As mentioned earlier, major changes in election district boundaries between 1930 and 1940 and between 1950 and 1960 make district analysis for those decades impossible.

Table 1.11 Population by Region and Election District: 1960 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Number Percent Percent Change

Region ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Election District 1980 1970 1960 1980 1970 1960 70‑80 60‑80

Total..........105,979 84,996 67,044 100.0 100.0 100.0 24.7 58.1

North............... 47,583 32,540 18,752 44.9 38.3 28.0 46.2 153.7

Dededo............ 23,644 10,780 5,126 22.3 12.7 7.6 119.3 361.3

Tamuning.......... 13,580 10,218 5,944 12.8 12.0 8.9 32.9 128.5

Yigo.............. 10,359 11,542 7,682 9.8 13.6 11.5 ‑10.2 34.8

Central............. 34,526 31,266 25,479 32.6 36.8 38.0 10.4 35.5

Agana............. 896 2,119 1,642 .8 2.5 2.4 ‑57.7 ‑45.4

Agana Heights..... 3,284 3,156 3,210 3.1 3.7 4.8 4.1 2.3

Asan.............. 2,034 2,629 3,053 1.9 3.1 4.6 ‑22.6 ‑33.4

Barrigada......... 7,756 6,356 5,430 7.3 7.5 8.1 22.0 42.8

Chalan Pago/Ordot. 3,120 2,931 1,835 2.9 3.4 2.7 6.4 70.0

Mangilao.......... 6,840 3,228 1,965 6.5 3.8 2.9 111.9 248.1

Mong‑Toto‑Maite... 5,245 6,057 3,015 4.9 7.1 4.5 ‑13.4 74.0

Piti.............. 2,866 1,284 1,467 2.7 1.5 2.2 123.2 95.4

Sinajana.......... 2,485 3,506 3,862 2.3 4.1 5.8 ‑29.1 ‑35.7

South............... 23,870 21,190 22,813 22.5 24.9 34.0 12.6 4.6

Agat.............. 3,999 4,308 3,107 3.8 5.1 4.6 ‑7.2 28.7

Inarajan.......... 2,059 1,897 1,730 1.9 2.2 2.6 8.5 19.0

Merizo............ 1,663 1,529 1,398 1.6 1.8 2.1 8.8 19.0

Santa Rita....... 9,183 8,109 12,126 8.7 9.5 18.1 13.2 ‑24.3

Talofofo.......... 2,006 1,935 1,352 1.9 2.3 2.0 3.7 48.4

Umatac............ 732 813 744 .7 1.0 1.1 ‑10.0 ‑1.6

Yona.............. 4,228 2,599 2,356 4.0 3.1 3.5 62.7 79.5

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

The villages with the greatest increases in population between 1970 and 1980 were Dededo, Piti, and Mangilao, and those showing decreases were Yigo, Agana, Asan, Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite, Sinajana, Agat, and Umatac. There were many factors influencing these variations in population growth, although war and post‑war activities were especially significant.

The village of Agana has traditionally been Guam's most important community, possessing a rich history dating back to the pre‑contact era (Sanchez, 1979:9). Its chiefs were the most respected in the Marianas in pre‑contact Guam. The Spanish recognized this and established the seat of government at Agana. The U.S. Navy continued to use Agana as its administrative center when it began its administration of the island.

At the beginning of American administration of Guam, Agana's boundaries actually encompassed all of the Northern and most of the Central portions of Guam. By 1930, Agana contained 11,042 persons. The population was so concentrated in one area that urban Agana contained 8,690 persons in 1930, nearly half the island's population. Agana city's population continued to grow until 1940, when it had a population of 10,004 (Table 1.12)

Table 1.12 Population of Agana City: 1920 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Percent

Number of Total

Year Number Change Population

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1980..... 896 ‑1223 .8

1970..... 2119 477 2.5

1960..... 1642 842 2.5

1950..... 800 ‑9204 1.3

1940..... 10004 1314 44.9

1930..... 8690 1258 47.0

1920..... 7432 ... 56.0

________________________________________________________

Note: The boundaries of Agana City have remained

constant between 1920 and 1980.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

The Japanese occupied Guam from December 10, 1941 until July 1944. Agana was used as their seat of government and their military headquarters; however, forced relocation of the population left the city virtually deserted, with no more than 200 families. The recapture of the island in 1944 was preceded by American bombardment from shipboard artillery for 13 consecutive days prior to Guam's recapture, totally destroying the city.

After Guam's recapture, U.S. military and civilian authorities decided to reestablish the government in Agana. Because of the massive destruction of the city during Guam's recapture, the military government literally bulldozed the remains of the city into the sea, creating a new peninsula of land, and obliterating all remaining streets and property boundary markers.

A new system of streets was laid out in Agana, using a different method of surveying from the Spanish system previously used. Later, in the 1950's, the Government of Guam superimposed still another survey methodology on top of the other two. This resulted in a "fractional lot" problem in Agana that is still being resolved in the 1980's. The depopulation of the city during the war and unresolved property disputes after the war caused the number of persons living in Agana to decline from 10,004 persons in 1940 to just 800 persons in 1950. A portion of its pre‑war population was regained by 1970, but the population declined from 2,119 to 896 persons between 1970 and 1980.

The most dramatic growth occurred in the Northern district of Dededo, growth which began shortly after the liberation in 1944. From a total population of 5,126 in 1960, Dededo's population increased by more than 360 percent during the next 20 years, reaching 23,644 persons in 1980. This striking increase was fueled by in‑migration of Filipinos, Micronesians, Statesiders and other non‑indigenous people. Private residential and apartment construction, as well as business construction, flourished in the area, making it the largest and fastest growing district in the Territory.

The Central, coastal village of Piti experienced the largest percent population increase (123 percent) of any district between 1970 and 1980. However, growth in the civilian, non‑federal lands was 230 persons, or 18 percent between 1970 and 1980. Piti contains part of Apra Harbor, which has been under U.S. Navy control since Guam became a U.S. possession. It was the homeporting of a Navy ship in Apra Harbor between 1970 and 1980, housing 1,352 military personnel, that caused the population of the Piti to double between 1970 and 1980.

The Northern district of Yigo showed population growth during the 1960's, but declined by 10 percent between 1970 and 1980. After most of Machanao's land area became occupied by Andersen Air Force Base immediately after World War II, Machanao was annexed to Yigo. The fluctuations in Yigo's population between 1960 and 1980 have been partially the result of changes in the number of persons living on the base and in government quarters near the base. The beginning and ending of the Vietnam Conflict, a war in which Guam's Air Force personnel played a major role, contributed to the growth of the population in Yigo during the 1960's, and the decreased population during the 1970's. The civilian‑held portion of Yigo actually grew in population by 90 percent (2,506 persons) between 1970 and 1980, while the population on federal lands decreased by 42 percent.

The Central district of Asan was another area losing population between 1960 and 1980, declining by 33 percent during the period. In the late 1970s, continuing into the 1980s, Asan upgraded and modernized its infrastructure and public utilities under a federally‑supported community redevelopment program. Delays to the urban renewal project caused by archaeological findings and funding problems left the project incomplete prior to the 1980 census. In addition to this, part of Asan was designated as a U.S. War in the Pacific National Park. The limited land area left for redevelopment has contributed to the decline in population.

The district of Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite in Central Guam is comprised of three distinct communities. It was established as a single district in 1946. The number of persons living there shrank by 13 percent between 1970 and 1980 solely because of a decline of over 1,600 persons living on federal lands in the community of Mongmong, representing the closure of a Naval Air Station barracks. The civilian, residential portion of the district grew by slightly more than 800 persons, or almost 20 percent.

The population of the Central district of Sinajana decreased by 36 percent between 1960 and 1980. The municipality was first organized in 1930. Following World War II, the population of Sinajana grew tremendously with the construction of some 400 new homes. Population growth continued until the housing in the area became saturated, reaching 3,862 persons by 1960. Sinajana was the first district to be completely upgraded and modernized under a Federal renewal program in the mid 1970s. The urban renewal project resulted in the relocation of some residents to other areas of the island and the elimination of substandard housing lots. The decline in population between 1960 and 1980 is therefore not likely to continue into the future.

Among the Southern districts, Santa Rita contained the greatest number of persons in 1970 and in 1980. More than 63 percent of its population resided in Navy quarters in 1980, however. Most growth in the South between 1970 and 1980 occurred in Yona, where the majority of commercial and residential housing developments were constructed during the decade. The districts of Agat and Umatac decreased in population. Agat contained no military populations and no obvious development constraints; however, it may be that the district experienced out‑migration by the local resident population, while lacking major housing subdivision development to attract new residents. The situation in Umatac has been compounded by the lack of infrastructure development to support new housing subdivisions.

POPULATION ON FEDERALLY OWNED LANDS

The federal government owned and controlled one‑third of Guam's land area in 1980, which has not changed since the end of World War II. Military housing on those areas developed independently of the local economy. Defense requirements, the construction of government quarters in new areas, opening or closing of military barracks, and the decision to homeport U.S. Navy ships on Guam are factors that have determined the number and location of active duty military personnel and their dependents, rather than economic conditions and other factors influencing the number and distribution of the civilian population. Census data are available for the population on federal lands for 1970 and 1980, as shown in Table 1.13 The 1960 census gives data on persons living in housing units on federal lands; however, those living in group quarters are not reported for federal lands.

Table 1.13 Population Distribution by Non‑Federal/Federal Land Status

and by Urban Designation: 1970 and 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1980 1970

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Persons Percent Persons Percent

in in in in

Region Total Federal Federal Total Federal Federal

Election District Persons Lands Lands Persons Lands Lands

Total............ 105979 19550 18.4 84996 20316 23.9

Urban....... 41875 14063 33.6 21671 0 0

Percent........ 39.5 71.9 ... 25.5 0 ...

North............ 47583 8699 44.5 32540 10688 52.6

Urban....... 23208 8430 43.1 8230 0 0

Dededo................ 23644 3554 18.2 10780 1697 8.4

Tamuning.............. 13580 69 .4 10218 235 1.2

Yigo.................. 10359 5076 26 11542 8756 43.1

Central.......... 34526 5065 25.9 31266 4085 20.1

Urban....... 10126 0 0 10829 0 0

Agana................. 896 0 0 2119 0 0

Agana Heights......... 3284 314 1.6 3156 419 2.1

Asan.................. 2034 417 2.1 2629 535 2.6

Barrigada............. 7756 1716 8.8 6356 1105 5.4

Chalan Pago‑Ordot..... 3120 0 0 2931 0 0

Mangilao.............. 6840 856 4.4 3228 0 0

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite... 5245 410 2.1 6057 2026 10

Piti.................. 2866 1352 6.9 1284 0 0

Sinajana.............. 2485 0 0 3506 0 0

South............ 23870 5786 29.6 21190 5543 27.3

Urban....... 8541 5633 28.8 2612 0 0

Agat.................. 3999 0 0 4308 38 .2

Inarajan.............. 2059 0 0 1897 0 0

Merizo................ 1663 0 0 1529 0 0

Santa Rita............ 9183 5786 29.6 8109 5505 27.1

Talofofo.............. 2006 0 0 1935 0 0

Umatac................ 732 0 0 813 0 0

Yona.................. 4228 0 0 2599 0 0

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑B54 Table 4; PC(1)B54 Table 4

Table 1.13 shows that in 1970, 24 percent of the total population of Guam (20,316 persons) lived on federal land areas. Nearly 53 percent of these lived in the North, mostly on Andersen Air Force Base; 20 percent in the Central region, mostly at the Naval Air Station and Naval Regional Medical Center; and 27 percent lived in the South, in Apra Harbor housing. By 1980, the smaller number of persons on federal lands and growth in the civilian population caused the percent of persons living on federal lands to decrease to 18 percent. A larger share resided in Central Guam because of a naval vessel berthed in Piti.

Future military population living in federal land areas will be determined by the Defense Department. The 1990 census will probably see some shift in the geographic distribution of the population to Central Guam caused by the homeporting of additional ships in Apra Harbor since 1980. The local names of federal land areas are shown in Table 1.14.

Table 1.14 Population on Federal Lands: 1980

Region Percent Percent

Election District, Federal Land Area Persons Of Total Federal

Total persons........................... 105979 100 ...

Persons on federal land areas...... 19550 18.4 100

North...................................... 8699 8.2 44.5

Dededo, Naval Communication Station............. 3538 3.3 18.1

Dededo, Andersen Air Force Base Northwest Field. 16 0 .1

Tamuning, Harmon Annex.......................... 69 .1 .4

Yigo, Andersen Air Force Base................... 4892 4.6 25

Yigo, Marbo Annex............................... 184 .2 .9

Central.................................... 5065 4.8 25.9

Agana Heights, Naval Hospital................... 314 .3 1.6

Asan, U.S. Naval Hospital....................... 417 .4 2.1

Barrigada, Naval Air Station.................... 1650 1.6 8.4

Barrigada, Naval Communication Station.......... 66 .1 .3

Mangilao, Marbo Annex........................... 856 .8 4.4

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite, Naval Air Station.......... 410 .4 2.1

Piti, Vessel.................................... 1352 1.3 6.9

South...................................... 5786 5.5 29.6

Santa Rita, Apra Harbor Naval Reservation....... 5633 5.3 28.8

Santa Rita, U.S. Naval Magazine................. 153 .1 .8

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 1A, Table 1; Bureau

of Planning, Government of Guam.

POPULATION DENSITY

Guam's islandwide population density increased over 368 percent between 1940 and 1980, from 107 persons per square mile in 1940 to 507 persons per square mile in 1980, as shown in Table 1.15. Increases in density were not uniform throughout the island. The Northern portion of the island was the most populated region by 1980, but it was still not the most densely settled. Its density increased from 25 persons per square mile in 1940 to 670 in 1980. The Central region was the area with the highest population density on the island, increasing from 324 to 803 persons per square mile by 1980. At one time, the Southern portion of the island was more densely settled than the North, but by 1980, it had the lowest population density, only 251 persons per square mile. Density in the South increased rapidly between 1940 and 1960, but remained fairly constant between 1960 and 1980, reflecting the slower rate of growth in the South during the period of rapid growth in the North.

Table 1.15 Population Distribution and Density by Region: 1940 to 1980

Year Pcnt

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Change

Region 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1940‑80

Total population.... 105979 84996 67044 59498 22290 373.8

Area in square miles.. 209 209 209 209 209

Population density.... 507 407 321 285 107

North Population.. 47583 32540 18752 16147 1795 2580

Area in square miles.. 71 71 71 71 71

Population density.... 670 458 264 227 25

Central Population. 34526 31266 25479 26495 13946 147.8

Area in square miles.. 43 43 43 43 43

Population density.... 803 727 593 616 324

South Population... 23870 21190 22813 16856 6549 263.8

Area in square miles.. 95 95 95 95 95

Population density.... 251 223 240 177 69

________________________________________________________________________

Note: 1980 population in Central Guam includes 1352 persons living on

board military vessels.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑A54 1980 Table 4; PC(1)‑B54

1970 Table 5; P‑B54 1950 Table 34, Bureau of Planning, Government

of Guam.

URBAN‑RURAL DISTRIBUTION

In order to qualify as urban, an area must first meet the criteria of Census Designated Place (CDP). As discussed earlier, a CDP is a generally closely settled center of population without corporate limits. If the CDP has a population of at least 2,500 persons, it is urban. Rural areas are all areas that are not urban.

Although Places have been named by the Census Bureau since 1960, a comparison of urban‑rural distribution is not possible. Census definitions of CDP's have not been applied consistently on Guam for each census period. In 1960 and 1970, 16 CDP's were named. In 1980, an additional 16 CDP's were listed (Table 1.16). Many of those CDP's additionally named in 1980 were existing communities in 1970, and some were existing even in 1960. The inclusion of government quarters especially impacts on urban areas, as government quarters comprised over 34 percent of all urban areas in 1980.

Table 1.16 Population of Census Designated Places: 1960 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Census Designated Place 1980 1970 1960

Total................. 69106 35079 28567

North....................... 24248 10616 7627

Andersen Air Force Base... 4892 ... ...

Dededo Village............ 2524 2386 2247

Finegayan Station......... 3538 ... ...

Marbo Annex............... 1040 ... ...

Tamuning Village.......... 8862 8230 5380

Yigo Village.............. 3392 ... ...

Central..................... 27870 16257 13000

Agana Village............. 896 2119 1642

Agana Heights Village..... 2970 3156 3210

Agana Station............. 2060 ... ...

Asan Village.............. 726 755 543

Barrigada Village......... 3127 1549 1729

Barrigada Hts Subdivision. 1127 ... ...

Chalan Pago Village....... 1921 ... ...

Latte Heights Subdivision. 1056 ... ...

Maina Village............. 891 ... ...

Maite Village............. 419 ... ...

Mangilao Village.......... 4029 ... ...

Mongmong Village.......... 2058 5052 2285

Nimitz Hill Annex......... 417 ... ...

Ordot Village............. 1199 ... ...

Piti Village.............. 737 ... ...

Sinajana Village.......... 1879 2621 2861

Toto Village.............. 2358 1005 730

South....................... 16988 8206 7940

Agat Village.............. 2908 2612 2596

Apra Harbor............... 5633 ... ...

Inarajan Village.......... 918 614 761

Merizo Village............ 1500 731 508

Santa Rita Village........ 1264 1976 1630

Santa Rosa Subdivision.... 860 ... ...

Talofofo Village.......... 1470 844 947

Umatac Village............ 487 423 393

Yona Village.............. 1948 1006 1105

_____________________________________________________________________

Note: Symbol "..." indicates an area was not designated a CDP.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑A54 1980 Table 9.

Urban areas on Guam contained 40 percent of the population in 1980 or 41,875 persons (Table 1.17). The North was the most densely urban, with half of its population residing in urban areas. The population of the village of Tamuning was 65 percent urban. The federal land areas of Andersen Air Force Base in Yigo and Finegayan Station in Dededo contributed to the urban density. Nearly 36 percent of the population of Southern Guam resided in urban areas, exclusively in Agat (73 percent urban) and Santa Rita (61 percent urban). In contrast, only 29 percent of the population of Central Guam lived in urban areas, 90 percent in Agana Heights, 40 percent of Barrigada, and 59 percent of Mangilao. The larger percent urban in the South as opposed to Central Guam is the result of military housing in Santa Rita.

Table 1.17. Urban and Rural Residence by Election District: 1980

Number Percent

Region ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑Percent

Election District Total Urban Rural Total Urban Rural Urban

Total.......... 105,979 41,875 64,104 100.0 100.0 100.0 39.5

North............... 47,583 23,208 24,375 44.9 55.4 38.0 48.8

Dededo............ 23,644 6,062 17,582 22.3 14.5 27.4 25.6

Tamuning.......... 13,580 8,862 4,718 12.8 21.2 7.4 65.3

Yigo.............. 10,359 8,284 2,075 9.8 19.8 3.2 80.0

Central............. 34,526 10,126 24,400 32.6 24.2 38.1 29.3

Agana............. 896 0 896 .8 0.0 1.4 0.0

Agana Heights..... 3,284 2,970 314 3.1 7.1 .5 90.4

Asan.............. 2,034 0 2,034 1.9 0.0 3.2 0.0

Barrigada......... 7,756 3,127 4,629 7.3 7.5 7.2 40.3

Chalan Pago/Ordot. 3,120 0 3,120 2.9 0.0 4.9 0.0

Mangilao.......... 6,840 4,029 2,811 6.5 9.6 4.4 58.9

Mong‑Toto‑Maite... 5,245 0 5,245 4.9 0.0 8.2 0.0

Piti.............. 2,866 0 2,866 2.7 0.0 4.5 0.0

Sinajana.......... 2,485 0 2,485 2.3 0.0 3.9 0.0

South............... 23,870 8,541 15,329 22.5 20.4 23.9 35.8

Agat.............. 3,999 2,908 1,091 3.8 6.9 1.7 72.7

Inarajan.......... 2,059 0 2,059 1.9 0.0 3.2 0.0

Merizo............ 1,663 0 1,663 1.6 0.0 2.6 0.0

Santa Rita....... 9,183 5,633 3,550 8.7 13.5 5.5 61.3

Talofofo.......... 2,006 0 2,006 1.9 0.0 3.1 0.0

Umatac............ 732 0 732 .7 0.0 1.1 0.0

Yona.............. 4,228 0 4,228 4.0 0.0 6.6 0.0

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑A54 1980, Table 4.

SUMMARY

For the purpose of population analysis, Guam can be divided into Northern, Southern, and Central areas for census periods between 1940 and 1980. The smaller geographic units of election districts are comparable between 1960 and 1980, having undergone extensive reorganization on several occasions prior to 1960.

Prior to World War II, nearly half of Guam's population lived in the one square mile village of Agana, in Central Guam. Military occupation during and after the war dispersed the indigenous population into other areas of the island. Fractional lot problems in Agana contributed to the difficulty of repopulating the village after the war. In other parts of the island, families gave up their inherited lands to the U.S. government, which seized over one‑third of Guam's land for defense purposes.

The decades 1940 through 1980 thus became a period of rapid growth in the North. New inhabitants included both indigenous residents and new off‑island migrants from the United States and Asia. The population of the North increased a remarkable 45,788 persons, from 1,795 in 1940 to 47,583 in 1980. Growth in the other regions did not match the population increase of the North. The Central region, the most populated area in 1940, added 20,580 persons, while the South grew by 17,321 persons.

In the Southern region, the villages of Merizo, Umatac, and Inarajan have retained their rural character, with interior mountainous areas not suited for housing development. Some new development has occurred during the 1980's in the more gently sloping areas of Yona and Talofofo, as improved roads shorten travel time to the commercial further North, and generally improved infrastructure opens the area for development.

Of the individual election districts showing decreases and large increase in population between 1960 and 1970, the number of military personnel living on federal lands was often the source of the change. The population living on federal lands should be taken into account in analyzing the growth trends of election districts. Growth caused by the homeporting of military vessels and declines caused by the closure of military barracks are significant in that they do not affect future birth rates, education needs, or housing markets, nor do fluctuations in the number of military personnel necessarily mean that a trend has been established.

In 1980, 40 percent of the population lived in urban places. Of that 40 percent, one‑third lived on military reservations. It is probable that more and more places in the civilian portions of Northern and Central Guam will meet the 2,500 and over resident criterion for urban places in the future as the regions become more populated. The military will probably not contribute greatly to the development of additional urban areas until new government quarters are built.

É[1]„!B„!ÉË

Ë‚À

EÀÎÎÐB_ÐÀ

EEÀÀEGÀË

ËÀG?ÀÃ#‑ÃCHAPTER 2œƒ

Ã#Ã AGE AND SEX CHARACTERISTICSœƒ

Ë
ËÀ? UÀ

The age and sex composition of a population provides information

necessary to plan for community development and for determining changing

social and economic characteristics. Age is the crucial factor for

determining various potential populations for schooling, manpower, and

voting. Sex is important in understanding social perspective and trends in

a community and a population's potential economic activity.

The data on sex were derived from answers to question 3. At the time

of field review, most cases in which sex was not reported were resolved by

determining the appropriate entry from the person's given name and household

relationship. When sex remained blank, it was allocated according to the

relationship to the householder and the age and marital status of the

person.

The data on age were derived from answers to question 5. Only the

information in items 5b and 5c (on month and year of birth) was read into

the computer. Answers to questions 5a (on age at last birthday) were used

during field review to fill any blanks in question 5c. The age

classification was based on the age of the person in completed years as of

April 1, 1980. The data on age represent the difference between date of

birth and April 1, 1980.

In Chapter 1 we discussed historical statistics for Guam, including age and sex distributions, starting with information from the 1700s. In this, and subsequent chapters, we will be discussing recent statistics for Guam, with a view for the potential use of the data for planning purposes.

The population of Guam has been aging in recent years, partly because

of reduced fertility (which will be described in Chapter 5), partly as a

result of even more drastic decreases in mortality (as described in Chapter

6), and partly because of the unusual migration situation, with large

numbers of relatively "middle-aged" migrants (discussed in detail in Chapter 7).

AGE AND SEX CHARACTERISTICSœ

The median age of Guam's population in 1980 was 22.2 years, compared to 30.0 in the United States (Table 2.1 and Figure 2.1). The median age is

that age which is the exact mid-point of all ages, that is, half the people

were older and half the people were younger. The median had decreased

slightly from 18.1 in 1920 to 17.9 in 1940, partly due to the influenza

epidemic's remains in 1919 having affected fertility, and the whooping cough epidemic in the 1930s. The median increased by 5 years in 1950 because of relatively large numbers of military stationed on Guam. When many of these persons in the Armed Forces were gone in 1960, the median decreased again, and only increased for the 1980 census, probably as a result of decreased fertility and migration.

Ñÿÿ U [1]

ÿÑÇ"Ç

In most populations, the median for females is higher than for males,

but the military on Guam affects those figures as well. In the early

decades of the century, before the Armed Forces were on Guam in any

significant numbers, females generally were older than males (with the

exception of 1930). In 1950, the median for males was 3 years older than

for females because of the Armed Forces and contract workers sent to support

the military. Males were more than 6 years older than females in 1960, and

3 years older in 1970. Partly because of the reduction in the military and

a change in their age and sex structure, and because of the increase in the

local populations, by 1980 the median age for males and females was the

same.

À UUÀ

Table 2.1. Median Age: 1920 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------

Census

Year Total Males Females

---------------------------------------------------------

1980 22.2 22.2 22.2

1970 20.4 21.6 18.2

1960 20.8 22.9 16.5

1950 22.8 23.3 20.3

1940 17.9 17.3 18.5

1930 18.8 19.1 18.6

1920 18.1 17.3 18.9

_________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

ÀU UÀ

ËÀ UGÀÃ'ÃFigure 2.1 Median Age: 1920 to 1980œƒ

ËÀG UÀÜÜ
The median age of the population by region varied over time (Table

2.2). In 1930, the Central region had the lowest median age (16.4 years),

followed by the North (17.7 years); by 1950, the Central region had the

highest median age (23.3 years), with the North second highest (23.2 years).

These fluctuations between regions could be a result of regional migration

and the presence of the military in certain regions.

À UUÀTable 2.2 Median Age by Region: 1930 to 1980

------------------------------------------------

Year

Region 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1930

------------------------------------------------

Guam... 22.2 20.4 20.8 22.8 17.9 18.8

North....... 22.9 22.1 21.6 23.2 18.3 17.7

Central..... 22.5 20.0 18.9 23.3 17.7 16.4

South....... 20.5 18.7 23.4 21.9 18.3 18.1

________________________________________________

Source: Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

ÀU UÀ

The effect of the Armed Forces on the sex distribution is more clearly

seen in Table 2.3 (and Figure 2.2). As noted previously, in most

populations there are more females than males. In fact, on Guam in 1920,

there were 295 more females than males, but that was the last census to show

a surplus of females. The sex distributions in 1930 and 1940 were not

abnormal, but by 1950, a change had occurred. In 1950 there were 21,472

more males than females, and the number of males per 100 females doubled,

from 103 in 1940 to 213 in 1950. In 1950, there were more than 2 males for

every female on the island. With decreased military activity, the number of

males per 100 females decreased, until it reached 109 in 1980, more than any

State except Alaska, which had a surplus of males for other reasons.

À U
UÀTable 2.3. Males per 100 Females: 1920 to 1980

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Census Surplus of Males per

Year Males Females Males 100 Females

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1980 55,321 50,658 4,663 109.2

1970 47,362 37,634 9,728 125.8

1960 39,211 27,833 11,378 140.9

1950 40,485 19,013 21,472 212.9

1940 11,294 10,983 311 102.8

1930 9,630 8,879 751 108.5

1920 6,490 6,785 -295 95.7

_______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

À
U UÀÜÜ
Ë

ËÀ UGÀÃ'ÃFigure 2.2 Males per 100 Females: 1920 to 1980œƒ

ËÀG UÀ

The distribution by age has changed somewhat since 1940, the first

decennial census to display 5 years age groups for ages up to 75 years

(Table 2.4). Between 1940 and 1950, the percentages of persons under 5

decreased, probably partly because of residual reduced fertility following

the war, but primarily because of increased migration of Armed Service

personnel and contract workers. The change in the 5 to 14 year olds was

even greater, decreasing by 7 percentage points for the 5 to 9 years olds

and 6 percentage points for the 10 to 14 year olds. Much of this decrease

must be attributed to many women not having children during the war years.

This group which would normally have created an unusual effect in the

age distribution over time, much as the baby boomers has created a bulge

which is gradually working its way through the age distribution in the

United States, cannot be seen for later censuses because of the great

influx of military personnel and contract workers, starting in the 1940s.

Hence, although this decrease is seen for 5 to 14 year olds in 1950, by 1960

when this group was 15 to 24, the number of Armed Forces personnel in this

same age group was so great, that the Natives have to be disaggregated to

see the affects on that segment of the population. (We have disaggregated

the population by ethnicity in Chapter 8).

À U

UÀTable 2.4. Population by Age and Sex: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Numbers Percent

------------------------------------ -----------------------------

Age Group 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total.105,979 84,996 67,044 59,498 22,290 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

0 to 4. 13,002 11,635 10,824 7,568 3,746 12.3 13.7 16.1 12.7 16.8

5 to 9. 12,632 11,762 9,164 4,453 3,261 11.9 13.8 13.7 7.5 14.6

10 to 14. 11,338 10,304 7,254 4,084 2,827 10.7 12.1 10.8 6.9 12.7

15 to 19. 10,993 8,049 4,994 7,162 2,228 10.4 9.5 7.4 12.0 10.0

20 to 24. 11,108 10,270 6,744 11,378 1,870 10.5 12.1 10.1 19.1 8.4

25 to 29. 10,324 6,406 5,572 7,275 1,719 9.7 7.5 8.3 12.2 7.7

30 to 34. 9,289 6,171 6,617 5,452 1,455 8.8 7.3 9.9 9.2 6.5

35 to 39. 6,246 5,474 5,151 4,044 1,203 5.9 6.4 7.7 6.8 5.4

40 to 44. 5,049 4,792 3,403 2,761 946 4.8 5.6 5.1 4.6 4.2

45 to 49. 4,189 3,530 2,631 2,014 812 4.0 4.2 3.9 3.4 3.6

50 to 54. 3,983 2,305 1,736 1,216 599 3.8 2.7 2.6 2.0 2.7

55 to 59. 2,914 1,748 1,171 810 501 2.7 2.1 1.7 1.4 2.2

60 to 64. 1,927 1,070 695 483 435 1.8 1.3 1.0 .8 2.0

65 to 69. 1,418 689 478 346 291 1.3 .8 .7 .6 1.3

70 to 74. 809 351 271 204 210 .8 .4 .4 .3 .9

75 + .... 758 440 339 248 174 .7 .5 .5 .4 .8

___________________________________________________________________________

Note: 1940 includes 13 persons of unknown age.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

U UÀ

The military influence is clearly seen in the 1950 census results,

since almost 1 in every 5 persons on Guam was between 20 and 24 in that

year, up from only 1 in 12 in 1940. The proportion decreased to about 1 in

10 in 1960 and subsequent years. About 1 in every 8 persons on Guam in 1950

was between 15 and 19, and about the same proportion were between 25 and 29.

Altogether about 43 percent of the population in 1950 was between 15 and 29.

About 16 percent of the 1960 population were under 5, and another 14

percent were 5 to 9, showing the effects of the baby boom on Guam. By 1970,

fertility had begun to decrease, with only 14 percent of the population less

than 5 years old, and by 1980 the decrease continued, to 12 percent of the

population.

The proportion of the population which was elderly remained low

throughout the period, partly because of the influence of the presence of

the military (which decreased the percentage of youth as well as elderly),

and partly because the birth rate was high, and continued to be fairly high

even in 1980 (although very low compared to the developing world). Just

over 3 percent of the population in 1940 was 65 years and over. The

proportion of elderly decreased to between 1 and 2 percent from 1950 to

1970, and increased to 3 percent again in 1980. As will be shown in Chapter

8 on ethnicity, most of the elderly were Chamorro, so that as the rest of

the population ages, the percentage of elderly will increase, as will the

need to provide housing and other services for these persons.

Traditionally, Chamorro culture has made provisions for its elderly, with

specific roles within the extended family context. As the society has

"Westernized" many of these roles have changed, resulting in the likelihood

of new mechanisms being needed to care for the elderly, particularly as

non-Chamorros become part of this group.

DEPENDENCY RATIOœ

The dependency ratio is derived by dividing the sum of persons under 15

(the pre-labor force youth) and the elderly (those over 64), by the persons

generally included in the potential labor force (those 15 to 64), and

multiplying by 100. A dependency ratio of 100 would mean that there is

exactly one dependent for each potential worker; a higher number would mean

that there are more dependents than workers, and a lower number means that

there are more workers than dependents.

In 1940, before the military "invasion", the population was closest to

a dependency ratio of 100, with a figure of 89 (89 dependents for every 100

potential workers) (Table 2.5). The dependency ratio in 1950 was only 40,

less than half of the ratio for 1940, showing both greatly reduced fertility

in the war years and the huge influx of military personnel in the late

1940s. This value is unlikely to occur in any "natural" environment, and is

due to the large numbers of young and middle-aged adults on island in

connection with the Armed Forces. This kind of figure makes analysis of the

dependency ratios fairly useless since some segments of the population were

still living at subsistence levels, and other segments were living off an

artificially constructed economy, including PXs and other imported goods and

materials.

The dependency ratios in 1960, 1970, and 1980, continued to show the

influence of the military. After a jump in 1960 because of proportionally

fewer military on island however, the ratio continued to decrease to 60 in

1980. The decrease in the 20 years before the 1980 census was due both to

increased immigration of aliens in the middle years (as well as

Statesiders), and decreased fertility (which was far greater than the slight

increase in the elderly population.)

À U
UÀTable 2.5. Dependency Ratios: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Age Group 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Total..... 105,979 84,996 67,044 59,498 22,277¼1

0 to 14..... 36,972 33,701 27,242 16,105 9,834

15 to 64..... 66,022 49,815 38,714 42,595 11,768

65 +......... 2,985 1,480 1,088 798 675

Dependency

Ratio...... 60.5 70.6 73.2 39.7 89.3

____________________________________________________________________

1) Excludes 13 persons of unknown age.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

À
U UÀ

The male population has shown the fluctuations in the age distribution

more dramatically than the female population, because most of the early

military personnel were males (Table 2.6). Again, the age distribution for

1940 was fairly "normal" because most of the residents were Chamorros and

were living without military activity. In 1950, all of this had changed.

In 1950, almost 1 in every 4 males was between 20 and 24, another 14

percent were between 15 and 19, and another 13 percent were between 25 and

29. Hence, more than half the males were in this 15 year age range. Most

of these males were military personnel. The proportion of males in this age

range has remained large throughout the rest of the period because of

continued military activity on island.

À U

UÀTable 2.6. Males by Age and Sex: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Numbers Percent

------------------------------------ -----------------------------

Age Group 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Males. 55,321 47,362 39,211 40,485 11,300 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

0 to 4. 6,620 5,962 5,614 3,885 1,945 12.0 12.6 14.3 9.6 17.2

5 to 9. 6,458 6,054 4,593 2,286 1,734 11.7 12.8 11.7 5.6 15.4

10 to 14. 5,835 5,362 3,685 2,129 1,463 10.5 11.3 9.4 5.3 13.0

15 to 19. 5,849 4,148 3,053 5,583 1,092 10.6 8.8 7.8 13.8 9.7

20 to 24. 6,019 6,642 4,527 9,613 885 10.9 14.0 11.5 23.7 7.8

25 to 29. 5,194 3,569 3,386 5,231 897 9.4 7.5 8.6 12.9 7.9

30 to 34. 4,854 3,538 4,526 3,812 748 8.8 7.5 11.5 9.4 6.6

35 to 39. 3,386 3,267 3,440 2,850 621 6.1 6.9 8.8 7.0 5.5

40 to 44. 2,650 3,038 2,172 1,859 504 4.8 6.4 5.5 4.6 4.5

45 to 49. 2,171 2,192 1,684 1,380 402 3.9 4.6 4.3 3.4 3.6

50 to 54. 2,238 1,334 1,036 793 300 4.0 2.8 2.6 2.0 2.7

55 to 59. 1,634 1,015 642 482 231 3.0 2.1 1.6 1.2 2.0

60 to 64. 1,008 577 367 243 199 1.8 1.2 .9 .6 1.8

65 to 69. 729 324 223 157 119 1.3 .7 .6 .4 1.1

70 to 74. 392 160 117 84 83 .7 .3 .3 .2 .7

75 + .... 284 180 146 98 71 .5 .4 .4 .2 .6

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

U UÀ

The female population on Guam has not seen the tremendous fluctuations

the male age distribution experienced (Table 2.7). Some of this anomaly in

the 15 to 29 years old females in the 1950 census can be attributed to wives

who accompanied their husbands for military duty on island.

The increase in percentage of females in the 0 to 4 age group between

1940 and 1950 (from 16 to 19 percent) probably reflects real growth in this

age group, and, if the military were excluded from the male distribution,

males also would probably exhibit the same pattern. The late 1940s saw the

beginning of the baby boom on Guam as elsewhere, so that the high rates of 0

to 4 years olds in 1950 and 1960 reflect this higher fertility; almost 1 in

every 5 females in those two censuses were less than 5 years old. After the

1960 census, the percentage of these females decreased, partly as a result

of the baby bust, and partly because of increased migration of aliens and

persons from the States (including increased numbers of female military

personnel).

The proportion of female elderly has remained low, but, once again,

this may change as the general population ages.

À U

UÀTable 2.7. Females by Age and Sex: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Numbers Percent

------------------------------------ -----------------------------

Age Group 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Fmles. 50,658 37,634 27,833 19,013 10,990 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

0 to 4. 6,382 5,673 5,210 3,683 1,801 12.6 15.1 18.7 19.4 16.4

5 to 9. 6,174 5,708 4,571 2,167 1,527 12.2 15.2 16.4 11.4 13.9

10 to 14. 5,503 4,942 3,569 1,955 1,364 10.9 13.1 12.8 10.3 12.4

15 to 19. 5,144 3,901 1,941 1,579 1,136 10.2 10.4 7.0 8.3 10.3

20 to 24. 5,089 3,628 2,217 1,765 985 10.0 9.6 8.0 9.3 9.0

25 to 29. 5,130 2,837 2,186 2,044 822 10.1 7.5 7.9 10.8 7.5

30 to 34. 4,435 2,633 2,091 1,640 707 8.8 7.0 7.5 8.6 6.4

35 to 39. 2,860 2,207 1,711 1,194 582 5.6 5.9 6.1 6.3 5.3

40 to 44. 2,399 1,754 1,231 902 442 4.7 4.7 4.4 4.7 4.0

45 to 49. 2,018 1,338 947 634 410 4.0 3.6 3.4 3.3 3.7

50 to 54. 1,745 971 700 423 299 3.4 2.6 2.5 2.2 2.7

55 to 59. 1,280 733 529 328 270 2.5 1.9 1.9 1.7 2.5

60 to 64. 919 493 328 240 236 1.8 1.3 1.2 1.3 2.1

65 to 69. 689 365 255 189 172 1.4 1.0 .9 1.0 1.6

70 to 74. 417 191 154 120 127 .8 .5 .6 .6 1.2

75 + .... 474 260 193 150 103 .9 .7 .7 .8 .9

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

U UÀË

ËÀ UGÀÃ'ÃFigure 2.3 Age and Sex Distribution: 1940œƒ

ÜÜ

Ã'ÃFigure 2.4 Age and Sex Distribution: 1950œƒ

Ã'ÃFigure 2.5 Age and Sex Distribution: 1960œƒ

ÜÜ

Ã'ÃFigure 2.6 Age and Sex Distribution: 1970œƒ

Ã'ÃFigure 2.7 Age and Sex Distribution: 1980œƒ

ÜÜ
Ë

ËÀG UÀSEX RATIOœ

As noted earlier, the number of males per 100 females increased from

103 to 213 between 1940 and 1950 because of the influx of military

personnel, and then decreased first to 141 in 1960, then to 126 in 1970, and

109 in 1980 (Table 2.8 and Figure 2.8). As would be expected, the

proportions for young ages were closer to even numbers of males and females

(although we do not expect a figure of 100, because, world-wide, there are

about 106 males born for every 100 females).

The coming of the military to Guam also affected the proportion of

males and females in the military ages. In 1950, for example, there were

354 males for every 100 females aged 15 to 19, 545 males per 100 females

aged 20 to 24, 256 for those 25 to 29, with diminishing proportions after

that. As time has gone by, these proportions have decreased, but in some

ages have remained high, especially compared with similar populations in the

States and elsewhere. By 1960, only 20 to 24 and 30 to 39 year olds had

more than 2 males for each female, and none of the age groups in 1960 had

this disparity (although there were 183 males 20 to 24 years old for every

100 females in that age group).

There were more females than males 65 years and over (except for those

65 to 69 in 1980) for each of the censuses, showing increased male mortality

in the older age groups.

À U

UÀTable 2.8. Males per 100 Females by Age: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Surplus of Males Males Per 100 Females

------------------------------------ -----------------------------

Age Group 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total. 4663 9728 11378 21472 310 109.2 125.8 140.9 212.9 102.8

0 to 4. 238 289 404 202 144 103.7 105.1 107.8 105.5 108.0

5 to 9. 284 346 22 119 207 104.6 106.1 100.5 105.5 113.6

10 to 14. 332 420 116 174 99 106.0 108.5 103.3 108.9 107.3

15 to 19. 705 247 1112 4004 -44 113.7 106.3 157.3 353.6 96.1

20 to 24. 930 3014 2310 7848 -100 118.3 183.1 204.2 544.6 89.8

25 to 29. 64 732 1200 3187 75 101.2 125.8 154.9 255.9 109.1

30 to 34. 419 905 2435 2172 41 109.4 134.4 216.5 232.4 105.8

35 to 39. 526 1060 1729 1656 39 118.4 148.0 201.1 238.7 106.7

40 to 44. 251 1284 941 957 62 110.5 173.2 176.4 206.1 114.0

45 to 49. 153 854 737 746 -8 107.6 163.8 177.8 217.7 98.0

50 to 54. 493 363 336 370 1 128.3 137.4 148.0 187.5 100.3

55 to 59. 354 282 113 154 -39 127.7 138.5 121.4 147.0 85.6

60 to 64. 89 84 39 3 -37 109.7 117.0 111.9 101.2 84.3

65 to 69. 40 -41 -32 -32 -53 105.8 88.8 87.5 83.1 69.2

70 to 74. -25 -31 -37 -36 -44 94.0 83.8 76.0 70.0 65.4

75 + .... -190 -80 -47 -52 -32 59.9 69.2 75.6 65.3 68.9

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

U UÀÜÜ

ËÀ UGÀÃ'ÃFigure 2.8 Male/Female Ratio by Age: 1980œƒ

ËÀG UÀ

AGE DISTRIBUTIONœ

Table 2.9 shows the distribution by age for the election districts on

Guam. The overall median age for Guam was 22.2 years, with the North and

Central regions having higher median ages, and the South being younger.

Umatac had the lowest median age at 17.4 years, followed by Inarajan

(17.9 years), and Talofofo (18.2). Other villages with low median ages were

Merizo (18.5), Yona (18.6), and Chalan Pago-Ordot (19.0); only the last

village was not in the Southern region. The percentage of persons less than

18 years old also reflects the relative youth in these villages. Overall,

41 percent of Guam's population was less than 18 years old. Central and

Northern regions had slightly smaller percentages of persons in this age

group (40 percent for each), compared to the 45 percent for South. Both

Umatac and Inarajan had more than half their populations under 18 years old,

the result of high fertility, and probably less migration of young adults to

these southern villages.

About 3 percent of the population was 65 years or older. More than 6

percent of those living in Agana were 65 years or older, as were more than 5

percent of those in Agana Heights. Sinajana, Agat, and Inarajan each had

slightly less than 5 percent of their populations being elderly.

These data seem to show that the South remains somewhat more

traditional than the Central and Northern regions, with higher fertility,

and less military and other in-migration. The villages in the extreme South

seem even more traditional in age structure than the others.

À U
UÀTable 2.9. Age by Region and Election District: 1980

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

------------------- -------------------

Popula- Under 18 to 65 + Under 18 to 65 + Median

Election District tion 18 yrs 64 yrs years 18 yrs 64 yrs years Age

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total.......... 105979 43604 59390 2985 41.1 56.1 2.8 22.2

North............. 47583 19241 27156 1198 40.4 57.1 2.5 22.9

Dededo.............. 23644 10640 12437 567 45.0 52.6 2.4 20.9

Tamuning............ 13580 4549 8555 475 33.5 63.0 3.5 26.4

Yigo................ 10359 4040 6164 155 39.0 59.5 1.5 22.2

Central........... 34526 13633 19765 1128 39.5 57.2 3.3 22.5

Agana............... 896 275 566 55 30.7 63.2 6.1 27.4

Agana Heights....... 3284 1261 1855 167 38.4 56.5 5.1 23.7

Asan................ 2034 775 1170 92 38.1 57.5 4.5 23.3

Barrigada........... 7756 3017 4506 233 38.9 58.1 3.0 22.2

Chalan Pago-Ordot... 3120 1498 1507 115 48.0 48.3 3.7 19.0

Mangilao............ 6840 2859 3837 144 41.8 56.1 2.1 22.3

Mongmong-Toto-Maite. 5245 2229 2874 142 42.5 54.8 2.7 21.6

Piti................ 2866 616 2190 60 21.5 76.4 2.1 23.6

Sinajana............ 2485 1103 1260 122 44.4 50.7 4.9 20.6

South............. 23870 10728 12481 659 44.9 52.3 2.8 20.5

Agat................ 3999 1848 1964 188 46.2 49.1 4.7 20.2

Inarajan............ 2059 1038 924 97 50.4 44.9 4.7 17.9

Merizo.............. 1663 812 790 62 48.8 47.5 3.7 18.5

Santa Rita.......... 9183 3600 5446 138 39.2 59.3 1.5 22.3

Talofofo............ 2006 991 953 62 49.4 47.5 3.1 18.2

Umatac.............. 732 378 342 12 51.6 46.7 1.6 17.4

Yona................ 4228 2063 2063 101 48.8 48.8 2.4 18.6

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-B54, Table 14.

À
U UÀ

MILITARY AND CIVILIAN POPULATIONSœ

The special tabulations developed to disaggregate military households

from civilian households provide data on age and sex of the civilian

population, as well as those households having one or more military

personnel. Persons on active-duty military status are called "military

persons", households with one or more military persons residing there are

"military households".

Altogether, there were 83,226 persons (78 percent) living in households

or group quarters which contained only civilians. Of these, 42,056 (51

percent) were males, compared to 58 percent of males in military households

or in group quarters (Table 2.10).

The median ages for the two populations did not differ significantly,

but the distributions were significantly different. Although the median for

the whole population was 22.3 years, the median for civilians was slightly

less (21.8 years) and the median for the military was slightly more (22.9

years). The median for males in the military was about a year older than

for females, while the median for female civilians was about a half year

older than for males.

Once the military are disaggregated from the rest of the population,

the civilian age and sex distribution looks much more "normal". Military

personnel seem to have higher fertility than civilians, since 14 percent

were children less than 5 years old in military households, compared to 12

percent in civilian households. On the other hand, because they are in the

military, more than 1 in 5 of all military persons were 20 to 24 compared to

only 8 percent of the civilians. The percentage of military in the 25 to 29

year age group was double that of the civilians. More than 12 percent of

the military population was 30 to 34 years old compared to only 8 percent of

the civilian population.

On the other hand, slightly larger proportions of persons in the 35 to

44 year old age group were civilian than were military, partially because of

large numbers of immigrants in this age group (see Chapters 7 and 8). And,

larger proportions of persons older than 44 were civilian than were

military. More than 9 percent of the civilian population was 45 to 54 years

old, compared to less than 2 percent of the military population. And only

about 1 percent of the military population was 55 years old and over,

compared to more than 9 percent of the civilian population.

À UUÀTable 2.10. Age and Sex by Military Household Status: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Civilians Military

------------------------------------------------------

Age Group Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total....105979 55321 50658 83226 42056 41170 22753 13265 9488

Percent. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

0 to 4.... 12.3 12.0 12.6 11.7 11.9 11.6 14.2 12.1 17.1

5 to 9.... 11.9 11.7 12.2 12.4 12.7 12.2 10.1 8.5 12.3

10 to 14.... 10.7 10.5 10.9 12.0 12.3 11.8 5.8 5.0 7.0

15 to 19.... 10.4 10.6 10.2 11.1 11.1 11.1 7.7 8.8 6.1

20 to 24.... 10.5 10.9 10.0 7.5 6.6 8.5 21.3 24.4 16.9

25 to 29.... 9.7 9.4 10.1 8.0 7.2 8.7 16.3 16.3 16.3

30 to 34.... 8.8 8.8 8.8 7.8 7.6 7.9 12.4 12.4 12.4

35 to 44.... 10.7 10.9 10.4 11.0 11.1 10.9 9.4 10.3 8.3

45 to 54.... 7.7 8.0 7.4 9.4 10.0 8.7 1.7 1.5 2.0

55 to 59.... 2.7 3.0 2.5 3.4 3.8 3.0 .4 .3 .5

60 to 64.... 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.3 2.3 2.2 .2 .2 .3

65 and over. 2.8 2.5 3.1 3.4 3.2 3.7 .5 .3 .8

Median.... 22.3 22.4 22.1 21.8 21.5 22.0 22.9 23.2 22.2

___________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-C/D54, Table 19;

Unpublished tabulations.

ÀU UÀ

The percentage distribution by age group also shows differences (Table

2.11). Altogether females were 48 percent of the population on Guam in

1980; while females constituted almost half of the civilian population, they

were only about 4 in every 10 of the military population (and, of course,

many of these were dependents). Among the civilians, in the young ages

females were just slightly less than half of all persons and were more than

half of those 20 to 35 years old. For ages 35 to 64, however, there were

more males than females in the civilian population, probably because of the

selective nature of international migration, with larger numbers of male

immigrants than females. For the elderly, females were a larger percentage

of the civilian population than were males.

The military population showed a very different pattern. More than 2

of every 3 military persons between 15 and 24 were male, and while the

proportions decreased to below 6 in 10 for persons 25 to 34, more than 6 in

10 of those 35 to 44 were males. More than half of the persons 55 years and

over in military households, however, were female.

There is some evidence from these data that there is a discrepancy

between the military and civilian data for persons 20 to 29 which show

surpluses of civilian females. Military males who were on ships and left

their families behind would have been recorded as civilian since no one in

the household would have been identified as military; hence, this surplus of

civilian females in the age group was probably at least partially explained

by the fact that many of these women were married to military personnel who

were on ships and left their families behind. (Their children are less

easily disaggregated from all children.)

À UUÀTable 2.11. Percent Age and Sex by Military Household Status: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Civilians Military

------------------------------------------------------

Age Group Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total.... 100.0 52.2 47.8 100.0 50.5 49.5 100.0 58.3 41.7

0 to 4.... 100.0 50.9 49.1 100.0 51.3 48.7 100.0 49.7 50.3

5 to 9.... 100.0 51.1 48.9 100.0 51.6 48.4 100.0 49.1 50.9

10 to 14.... 100.0 51.5 48.5 100.0 51.7 48.3 100.0 50.0 50.0

15 to 19.... 100.0 53.2 46.8 100.0 50.6 49.4 100.0 66.8 33.2

20 to 24.... 100.0 54.2 45.8 100.0 44.4 55.6 100.0 66.9 33.1

25 to 29.... 100.0 50.3 49.7 100.0 45.9 54.1 100.0 58.2 41.8

30 to 34.... 100.0 52.3 47.7 100.0 49.6 50.4 100.0 58.3 41.7

35 to 44.... 100.0 53.4 46.6 100.0 51.1 48.9 100.0 63.4 36.6

45 to 54.... 100.0 54.0 46.0 100.0 54.1 45.9 100.0 50.9 49.1

55 to 59.... 100.0 56.1 43.9 100.0 56.4 43.6 100.0 47.3 52.7

60 to 64.... 100.0 52.3 47.7 100.0 52.5 47.5 100.0 44.4 55.6

65 and over. 100.0 47.1 52.9 100.0 47.5 52.5 100.0 37.4 62.6

___________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-C/D54, Table 19;

Unpublished tabulations.

ÀU UÀ

Table 2.12 further disaggregates the military data into persons who

were actually in the military in 1980 and those who were civilians but

living in military households. There were 10,125 persons (10 percent of

Guam's total population) on active-duty status in the military in 1980:

9,224 males and 901 females. The median age of these persons was 26.5

years, more than 4 years more than for the rest of the population in

military households (because so many of the other people in military

households were children), and about 4 years more than for the general

population of Guam.

Military persons constituted more than half of all persons 20 to 24

years old (67 percent of the males and 33 percent of the females in that age

group), and were 49 percent of the persons 25 to 29 years old. Of course,

for planning and other policy purposes, military households and families,

and not only the military persons must be considered, so the analysis in

this report for military-civilian differences focuses on the whole

household, and not merely the military person himself or herself.

À UUÀTable 2.12. Median Age by Sex and Military Status: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Military

------------------------------

Total Civilians Households Persons

------------------------------------------------------

Age Group Males Fmles Males Fmles Males Fmles Males Fmles Total

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total.... 55321 50658 42056 41170 13265 9488 9224 901 10125

0 to 4.... 6620 6382 5017 4758 1603 1624 0 0 0

5 to 9.... 6458 6174 5333 5007 1125 1167 0 0 0

10 to 14.... 5835 5503 5176 4843 659 660 0 0 0

15 to 19.... 5849 5144 4685 4565 1164 579 843 119 962

20 to 24.... 6019 5089 2782 3485 3237 1604 3149 460 3609

25 to 29.... 5194 5130 3038 3583 2156 1547 2094 214 2308

30 to 34.... 4854 4435 3204 3256 1650 1179 1622 64 1686

35 to 44.... 6036 5259 4673 4472 1363 787 1336 26 1362

45 to 54.... 4409 3763 4212 3573 197 190 152 15 167

55 to 59.... 1634 1280 1590 1231 44 49 17 3 20

60 to 64.... 1008 919 984 889 24 30 7 0 7

65 and over. 1405 1580 1362 1508 43 72 4 0 4

Median.... 22.4 22.1 21.5 22.0 23.2 22.2 26.5 22.2 26.1

____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-C/D54, Tables 19 and 36

ÀU UÀ

There were more than 10 active-duty military males for every military

female in 1980 (Table 2.13). None of the age groups showed anything like

equal proportions. Although there were fewer than 10 males per female for

persons less than 29 and more than 55, there were 25 males for every female

30 to 34, and 51 for those 35 to 44 years old.

Table 2.13 also shows that for all military households, there were more

females than males under 15 and over 55, but that males predominated in the

middle years, with more than 2 males per female 15 to 24 years old. The

problem with the ratio of males to females 20 to 29 in the civilian

population is also seen here, since there is a great surplus of females

here, once again indicating that some of these females should more properly

have been placed in the military category.

À UUÀTable 2.13. Males per 100 Females by Age and Military Status: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Military Military

Age Group Total Civilians Households Persons

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total.... 109.2 102.2 139.8 1023.8

0 to 4.... 103.7 105.4 98.7 ...

5 to 9.... 104.6 106.5 96.4 ...

10 to 14.... 106.0 106.9 99.8 ...

15 to 19.... 113.7 102.6 201.0 708.4

20 to 24.... 118.3 79.8 201.8 684.6

25 to 29.... 101.2 84.8 139.4 978.5

30 to 34.... 109.4 98.4 139.9 2534.4

35 to 44.... 114.8 104.5 173.2 5138.5

45 to 54.... 117.2 117.9 103.7 1013.3

55 to 59.... 127.7 129.2 89.8 566.7

60 to 64.... 109.7 110.7 80.0 ...

65 and over. 88.9 90.3 59.7 ...

______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-C/D54, Table 19 and

Table 36.

ÀU UÀ

SUMMARYœ

While the median age in 1980 was less than that of the U.S., Guam's

population is aging. Median age was higher for civilian females than for

civilian males; the opposite was true for the military, and the overall

median age for the military was higher than that of civilians. The

proportion of the total population less than 5 years old was 12 percent; the

proportion over 65 years was 3 percent. The dependency ratio in 1980 was

60.5.

From 1930 onward, the sex ratio of the population was greater than 103;

it was 109 in 1980. The sex ratio was higher for both military persons and

military households.

The military dominated in the age groups less than 5 years and 20 to 34

years; civilians did so in all other age groups. Due to definitions of

military households used in special retabulations of the 1980 census, some

military dependent spouses were put into the civilian category, causing

surpluses of female civilians in certain age groups.

We have briefly presented data on the age and sex distribution of the

population on Guam for 1940 through 1980. It is clear that because of the

military presence and the large amount of immigration, Guam will not show a

"normal" population distribution for the foreseeable future.

CHAPTER 3

HOUSEHOLD CHARACTERISTICS

class=Section3>

Characteristics of the households of Guam reflect many of the sociological and economic changes that have taken place over the years. For many years, extended family households, consisting of parents, children, grandparents, grandchildren, siblings, and other relatives were considered to be the norm. By 1980, extended families were the exception, as fertility and family size declined, and more people were employed in the cash than the subsistence economy. The decline of household size and changes in its composition can be seen in the Census data from 1940 to 1980.

The first question asked in the 1980 Census that was used in determining household status and relationships was Question 1: "What is the name of each person who was living here on Tuesday, April 1, 1980, or who was staying or visiting here and had no other home"?. The second was Item B: Type of unit or quarters, which was to be filled in by the enumerator or a Census office clerk. Question 2: "How is ___ related to ___(the person named in column one)?" was used to obtain the household relationships and helped to delineate family units. Possible responses fell into categories of being related to the person in column one (the householder), such as a spouse, child, sibling, parent, or other relative, and not being related to that person, such as boarder, roommate, paid employee, or other nonrelative. Several other questions in the household section of the questionnaire probed to determine if anyone was not listed, and whether they should be added to the list of household members.

The 1920 and 1930 Censuses did not have household or family questions. In the 1940 Census, the classification of household members was less detailed than in subsequent years. The term "private family" was used to designate everything from a person living alone to an extended family with others living in the home, such as employees and boarders, as long as they made up a single household. The only collection of persons residing together not considered a "private family" was a group of persons living in a hotel, a lodginghouse with five or more lodgers, a school dormitory, prison or jail, hospital or other institution where they were likely to remain for considerable periods of time, the personnel of a military post or a naval station, or the members of a camp or barracks of laborers. These persons were designated as "quasi-family groups". When tabulated, however, distinctions were made between heads of "private families", wives and children, other relatives, other members of private families, and members of "quasi-family groups".

The definitions used for households in the 1950 Census were similar to those used in the 1940 Census, with a change in terminology from "private families" to household. A household (in 1950) included all persons who occupied a house, an apartment, or other group of rooms, or a room that constituted a dwelling unit. In general, a group of rooms occupied a separate living quarters was a dwelling unit if it had separate cooking equipment or if it constituted the only living quarters in the structure. A household included both related family members and unrelated persons, such as lodgers and employees, as it did in 1940. A person living alone in a dwelling unit, or a group of unrelated persons sharing a dwelling unit as partners, was counted as a household. The number of "private families" in 1940 may be regarded as comparable to the number of households in 1950. Quasi-households were not counted as households in 1950.

In 1960, a household was defined as all persons who occupied a housing unit. A

house, apartment or other group of rooms, or a single room was a housing unit when it was occupied or intended for occupancy as a separate living quarters; that is, when the occupants did not live and eat with any other persons in the structure and when there was either direct access from outside or through a common hall, or a kitchen or cooking equipment for the exclusive use of the occupant. Groups of 5 or more persons living together, who were unrelated to the person in charge, were designated as living in group quarters.

The 1960 definition of a household differed slightly from that of 1950: the change arose as a result of the shift from a dwelling unit to a housing unit as the basis of enumeration. The number of households in 1960, however, is considered comparable to the number of households in 1950.

In the 1970 Census, substantial changes were made to the definition of a family, with families, households and group quarters being differentiated. According to the new definitions, a family consisted of a household head and one or more other persons living in the same household who were related to the head by blood, marriage, or adoption. All living arrangements other than households were classified as either "institutional" or "other" group quarters. Separate living quarters were group quarters if there were 5 or more persons unrelated to the head, or, if there was no designated head, 6 or more unrelated persons in the unit. Places that fell into this category were rooming and boarding houses, communes, worker's dormitories and convents. Military barracks and ships were regarded as group quarters regardless of the number or relationship of people in the unit.

In 1970, single persons living alone were considered single person households rather than families. Groups consisting of less than 5 unrelated persons living together (that were not in barracks, institutions, hotels, or dormitories) were "unrelated person" households rather than "quasi-families". "Subfamilies", married couples with or without children, or 1 parent with 1 or more single children under 18 years old, that were living in a household and related to, but not including, the head of household or his wife, was a new definition that began with the 1970 Census.

The 1980 Census continued with the subfamily designation and the differentiations between family- and non-family households. However, no designation of head of household was made in the 1980 questionnaire. The definition of group quarters was changed from 5 or more persons unrelated to the head of household (now called householder), to 9 or more persons unrelated to householder. If there were no head of household, 10 or more unrelated persons in a unit made it group quarters, instead of the previous requirement of 6 or more unrelated persons. This change in definition made some units that were group quarters in 1970 into households in 1980. The definition did not change for certain types of living arrangements, such as military barracks or ships.

HOUSEHOLD CHARACTERISTICS

Households with 2 or more persons made up 91 percent of all households on Guam in 1980 (Table 3.1). Single person households made up the remaining 9 percent.

Of those households with 2 or more persons, 82 percent were married couple families, 15 percent were other family households, and 4 percent were non-family households. Other family households were more often headed by females with no husband present (73 percent) than by males with no wife present (27 percent.) The opposite was true of non-family households: 73 percent of these were headed by male householders and 27 percent by female householders. More males lived in single person households (64 percent) than did females (36 percent.)

class=Section5>

Table 3.1 Households by Persons in Household and Household Type: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

------------------------ -----------------------

Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Households.. 24834 11595 8070 5169 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

1 person................... 2246 1061 896 269 9.0 9.2 11.1 5.2

Male householder......... 1415 698 545 172 5.7 6.0 6.8 3.3

Female householder....... 811 363 351 97 3.3 3.1 4.3 1.9

2 or more persons.......... 22608 10534 7174 4900 91.0 90.8 88.9 94.8

Married couple family.... 18473 8696 5597 4180 74.4 75.0 69.4 80.9

Other family............. 3307 1413 1251 643 13.3 12.2 15.5 12.4

Male householder, no

wife present.......... 892 435 320 137 3.6 3.8 4.0 2.7

Female householder, no

husband present....... 2415 978 931 506 9.7 8.4 11.5 9.8

Nonfamily household...... 828 425 326 77 3.3 3.7 4.0 1.5

Male householder....... 602 314 236 52 2.4 2.7 2.9 1.0

Female householder..... 226 111 90 25 .9 1.0 1.1 .5

___________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 1A, 1980, Table 16.

class=Section6>

There were slight differences in type of household by region: the Central region had a greater proportion of single person households than the other 2 regions, with the majority of single householders being male. The South had the smallest proportion of single female-headed households. The South claimed the highest percentage of households with 2 or more persons, followed by the North. The South also had the highest proportion of married-couple family households. The Central region had the highest percentage of female-headed family households.

Tables 3.2 through 3.4 show household and family composition from 1940 through 1980 as percentages of persons in each category. In 1940, 98 percent of the population of Guam lived in households. This proportion dropped to 62 percent in 1950, then steadily rose to 95 percent in 1980. The decrease in the proportion living in households from 1940 to 1950 can be attributed to an influx of military personnel and alien laborers after the end of World War II, most of whom lived in barracks-style housing. Their proportion of the population rose from 2 percent in 1940 to 38 percent in 1950. From 1950 to 1980, the increase in the proportion of persons living in households, from 62 percent to 95 percent, was paralleled by a decrease in the proportion living in non-institutional group quarters, which fell from 38 percent to 5 percent.

class=Section7>

Table 3.2 Percent Household Type: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------

Persons in Households 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

---------------------------------------------------------

Total persons.....105979 84996 67044 59498 22290

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

In households.............. 95.3 88.5 82.2 61.9 97.7

In families.............. 91.2 85.5 80.1 NA NA

In nonfamily households.. 4.1 2.9 2.1 NA NA

In group quarters.......... 4.7 11.5 17.8 38.1 2.3

_________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 1A,

Table 17; Decennial Census Reports.

class=Section8>

Most (97 percent) households were family households, and were composed of a head, spouse of the head, and other relatives of the head, primarily the own children of the head (Table 3.3). The proportion of the population in families increased slightly in each of the last 3 censuses, as did the proportion who were heads and spouses of heads of families. Single females as heads of families increased by 44 percent between 1970 and 1980. The proportion of children of family heads increased by 9 percent between 1960 and 1970, then decreased by 13 percent between 1970 and 1980. It would seem from the increase in families, heads of families, and spouses of family heads, and the decrease in own children of heads of families, that many of these family households in 1980 were married couples with no children who began new family homes between 1970 and 1980.

class=Section9>

Table 3.3 Percent Family Composition: 1960 to 1980

--------------------------------------------------------

Persons in Families 1980 1970 1960

--------------------------------------------------------

Total persons............. 105979 84996 67044

In households...................... 101000 75333 55140

Percent....................... 100.0 100.0 100.0

In families...................... 95.7 96.5 97.4

Head of family.................. 21.6 19.0 18.5

Female, no husband present^{1... 2.4
1.8 NA}

^{Male, no wife present......... .9
NA NA}

^{Spouse.......................... 18.3
16.0 16.1}

^{Other relatives................. 55.0
61.6 62.8}

^{Own child of head under 18 yrs. 39.1 48.6 48.1}

^{Other relative of head......... 15.9
12.9 14.7}

^{Not related to head2........... .8
NA NA}

^{Not in families................... 4.3
3.5 2.5}

^{____________________________________________________________}

^{1For
1960, it is not specified whether husband is present.}

^{2For
1960 and 1970, it is not indicated whether unrelated}

^{individuals
are in family or nonfamily households.}

^{SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File
1A Table 17;}

^{Decennial Census Reports.}

class=Section10>

^{The population that resided in either
nonfamily households or in group quarters steadily decreased between 1960 and
1980 (Table 3.4). Of that population,
the majority were in group quarters, though this proportion also
decreased. The proportion of those in
group quarters who were inmates of institutions remained constant at 1 percent
for the period; the greatest changes were for those in "Other" group
quarters: military or construction barracks.
In nonfamily households, both the percentage who were head of households
and those not related to the head increased.
The greatest amount of this increase was contributed by male
householders, whose proportion increased by 232 percent between 1970 and
1980. Some of these male householders
were men who separated or divorced between 1970 and 1980 and began new
households; some were military personnel who chose not to live in group
quarters on base, and rented a house off base.}

class=Section11>

^{Table
3.4 Percent Nonfamily and Group
Quarters:}

^{1960 to 1980}

^{------------------------------------------------------}

^{Persons 1980 1970
1960}

^{------------------------------------------------------}

^{Total persons........ 9359
12270 13342}

^{Percent........... 100.0
100.0 100.0}

^{In
nonfamily households.... 46.8 20.4
10.6}

^{Head of household........ 32.6
10.2 4.5}

^{Male householder....... 21.6
6.5 NA}

^{Female householder..... 11.1
3.7 NA}

^{Not related to head...... 14.2
10.2 6.0}

^{In
group quarters.......... 53.2 79.6
89.4}

^{Inmate of institution.... 1.5
1.1 1.0}

^{Other.................... 51.7
78.5 88.4}

^{________________________________________________________}

^{For
1960 and 1970, it is not indicated whether unrelated}

^{individuals are in family or nonfamily
households.}

^{SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File
1A Table 17;}

^{Decennial Census Reports.}

class=Section12>

^{HOUSEHOLD SIZE}

^{The average size of households on Guam
steadily decreased from 1940 to 1980.
In 1940, the average size of a household was 5.57 persons, decreasing to
4.99 persons in 1950. By 1980,
household size had further decreased to an average of 4.07 persons. The civilian community of Guam in 1980 had a
larger average household size than did the military, 4.25 persons and 3.41
persons, respectively. The average
number of persons per household in the United States in 1980 was 2.75 persons,
only two-thirds the size of Guam's average household.}

^{Household size also changed within
regions over the years, with Southern villages almost always having larger
households than any other region. Table
3.5 shows the average household size by region from 1940 to 1980. In 1940, the
region with the largest average number of persons per household was the South,
with 6.66 persons; the region with the smallest average was the North, with
4.47. In 1950, the region with the most
persons per household was the Central region, which had 5.34 persons per home
on the average; the North had the smallest average household size, with 4.06.}

class=Section13>

^{Table
3.5 Average Number of Persons per
Household by Region: 1940 to 1980}

^{---------------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Persons per Household}

^{--------------------------------------------------}

^{Region 1980 1970
1960 1950 1940}

^{---------------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Total............. 4.07
4.83 5.09 4.99
5.57}

^{North...................... 3.96
4.59 4.63 4.06
4.47}

^{Central.................... 3.98
4.91 5.24 5.34
5.74}

^{South...................... 4.43
5.11 5.45 5.22
6.66}

^{________________________________________________________________________}

^{Note: For 1940 and 1950, "regions" are
municipalities.}

^{SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Census
Reports.}

class=Section14>

^{By 1960, tabulations of average household
size were computed by election district (used interchangeably with
"village" in this monograph) as well as by geographical region (Table
3.6). In that year the village with the
highest number of persons per household was Talofofo, with an average of 7.01
persons. The lowest average household
size was in Santa Rita, with 4.25 persons.
Both of these villages were in the Southern region, the region with the
largest average household size, which had an average of 5.45 persons per
home. The region with the smallest
household size was the North, with 4.63 persons.}

^{In 1970, Umatac claimed the largest
average household size, with 6.25 persons, and Agana had the smallest, with
3.99. The region with the largest
average household size was again the South, with 5.11 persons per
household. The region with smallest
average was the North, with 4.59. This
distribution was true again in 1980: Umatac had the largest households, with
5.63 persons per household, Agana the smallest with 3.01. The South was the region with the largest
households, having an average of 4.43 persons, and the North had the smallest,
with 3.96.}

class=Section15>

^{Table
3.6 Average Number of Persons per Household by}

^{Election District: 1960 to 1980}

^{------------------------------------------------------}

^{Persons per
Household}

^{----------------------}

^{Election
District 1980 1970
1960}

^{------------------------------------------------------}

^{Total............. 4.07
4.83 5.09}

^{North...................... 3.96
4.59 4.63}

^{Dededo................... 4.57
4.81 4.89}

^{Tamuning................. 3.25
4.44 4.70}

^{Yigo..................... 3.87
4.48 4.35}

^{Central.................... 3.98
4.91 5.24}

^{Agana.................... 3.01
3.99 4.51}

^{Agana Heights............ 3.81
4.62 4.88}

^{Asan..................... 3.80
4.72 4.81}

^{Barrigada................ 4.10
5.06 5.32}

^{Chalan Pago-Ordot........ 4.71
5.64 6.09}

^{Mangilao................. 3.87
4.64 5.04}

^{Mongmong-Toto-Maite...... 3.97
4.75 5.00}

^{Piti..................... 3.61
5.28 5.41}

^{Sinajana................. 4.34
5.52 6.10}

^{South...................... 4.43
5.11 5.45}

^{Agat..................... 4.66
5.39 5.85}

^{Inarajan................. 5.21
6.12 6.68}

^{Merizo................... 4.70
5.71 6.26}

^{Santa Rita............... 3.90
4.18 4.25}

^{Talofofo................. 4.97 5.85 7.01}

^{Umatac...................
5.63 6.25 6.83}

^{Yona.....................
4.62 5.95 5.70}

^{____________________________________________________________}

^{SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Census
Reports.}

class=Section16>

^{Not only has the size of households
changed over the years, the number and distribution have as well. Tables 3.7 and 3.8 show the number and
proportion of households per region and village for 1940 through 1980. In 1940, the Central region had the highest
number and, accordingly, the greatest proportion of households. The region with the smallest number of
households was the North. In 1950 this had changed only slightly: Central again
had the largest number of households, and the Northern region the smallest.}

class=Section17>

^{Table
3.7 Households per Region: 1940 to
1980}

^{---------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Number | Percent}

^{-----------------------------|-----------------------------}

^{Region 1980
1970 1960 1950
1940| 1980 1970 1960
1950 1940}

^{---------------------------------------|-----------------------------}

^{Total.. 24834 15569 10807 7373
3913|100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0}

^{North....
11595 6052 3309 1792 402| 46.7
38.9 30.6 24.3
10.3}

^{Central.. 8070
5751 4539 3453
2398| 32.5 36.9 46.8
46.8 61.3}

^{South.... 5169
3766 2959 2128
1113| 20.8 24.2 27.8
28.9 28.4}

^{_____________________________________________________________________}

^{Note: For 1940, households are private families.}

^{Source:
U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Census Reports.}

class=Section18>

^{In 1960, the Central region had the
largest number of households, and the South had the smallest. The village with the largest number of
households overall was Santa Rita, with 1241 or 11.5 percent of the total number
of households; the smallest was Umatac, with only 109, or less than 1 percent
of the total households (Table 3.8).}

^{In 1970, the North had become the largest
region, which contained 6052 households or 38.9 percent of the total number of
homes. This was an 83 percent increase
in the number of homes in that region (Tables 3.8 and 3.9). By comparison, the number of households had
only increased by 27 percent in both the Central and Southern regions. One village even had a decrease in the
number of households reported between the 1960 and 1970 Censuses: Piti reported
3 homes less in 1970 than it had in 1960.}

^{By 1980 the Northern region had increased
its number of households by another 92 percent over 1970 levels, while the
Central region had increased by 40 percent and the South had grown by 37
percent. However, these increases were
not uniform: Agana, Asan, and Sinajana had each lost households in the Central
region, and Umatac, in the South, had not changed at all from 1970.}

class=Section19>

^{Table
3.8 Households per Village and Region: 1960 to 1980}

^{---------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Number Percent}

^{------------------- ----------------}

^{Village
1980 1970 1960
1980 1970 1960}

^{---------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Total.............24834
15569 10830 100.0 100.0 100.0}

^{North.............11595 6052
3309 46.7 38.9
30.6}

^{Dededo.......... 5104 2067
948 20.6 13.3
8.8}

^{Tamuning........ 4067 2039
1159 16.4 13.1
10.7}

^{Yigo............ 2424 1946
1202 9.8 12.5
11.1}

^{Central...........
8070 5751 4562 32.5 36.9
42.1}

^{Agana........... 294 453 318
1.2 2.9 2.9}

^{Agana Heights... 827 625 615
3.3 4.0 5.7}

^{Asan............ 526 552 539
2.1 3.5 5.0}

^{Barrigada....... 1747 1230
1020 7.0 7.9
9.4}

^{Chalan Pago-}

^{Ordot......... 660 512 285
2.7 3.3 2.2}

^{Mangilao........ 1709 667
304 6.9 4.3
2.8}

^Mongmong-

^{Toto-Maite...... 1312 843
586 5.4 5.4
5.4}

^{Piti............ 422 236 262
1.7 1.5 2.4}

^{Sinajana........ 573 633 633
2.3 4.1 5.9}

^{South.............
5169 3766 2959 20.8 24.2
27.3}

^{Agat............ 853 780 529
5.0 4.9 4.9}

^{Inarajan........ 392 307 259
1.6 2.0 2.4}

^{Merizo.......... 351 266 222
1.4 1.7 2.0}

^{Santa Rita...... 2131 1529
1241 8.6 9.8
11.4}

^{Talofofo........
398 322 193
1.6 2.1 1.8}

^{Umatac.......... 130 130
109 .5 .8 1.0}

^{Yona............ 914 432
406 3.7 2.8
3.7}

^{_______________________________________________________________}

^{SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Census
Reports.}

class=Section20>

^{The shift in household and population
location is even more visible when comparing the differences over a 20-year
span than over 10 year increments (Table 3.9).
From 1960 to 1980, the Central and Southern regions had increased their
numbers of households by 77 and 75 percent, respectively, while the Northern
region grew by 250 percent. Some of
this growth can be attributed to the opening of military housing areas in
Dededo in the 1970's, but the majority is due to new civilian low cost housing
tracts, which began being built in that
village and Yigo in the 1970's, and the proliferation of apartment units in
Tamuning.}

class=Section21>

^{Table
3.9 Percent Change in Households per
Region: 1940 to 1980}

^{------------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Percent Change from
Previous Census}

^{------------------------------------------------------}

^{1970- 1960-
1960- 1950- 1940-}

^{Region 1980 1970 1980 1960
1950}

^{------------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Total............. 59.5
43.8 129.3 46.9
88.4}

^{North............. 91.6
82.9 250.4 84.6
345.8}

^{Central........... 40.3
26.1 76.9 31.4
44.0}

^{South............. 37.2
27.3 74.7 39.0
91.2}

^{________________________________________________________________________}

^{SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Census
Reports.}

class=Section22>

^{FAMILY CHARACTERISTICS}

^{One measure of "family health"
is the change in the proportion of the population under 18 years of age living
with two parents, which is affected by the amount of divorce; another measure
is the increase in the proportion of female heads of households who have no
husband present, which is affected by both divorce and out-of-wedlock births. On Guam, many unmarried women with children
choose to apply for welfare assistance, including subsidized housing, and set
up their own households, rather than remain with their parents or other
relatives.}

^{Children under the age of 18 were present
in 68 percent of all households in 1980 (Table 3.10). These children in households represented over 99 percent of all
children under 18 (Table 3.11). In
1970, 81 percent of children lived in a married-couple family. By 1980, this figure was down to 79 percent.}

class=Section23>

^{Table
3.10 Households with One or More
Persons Under 18 Years}

^{By Household Type: 1980}

^{------------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Number Percent Percent}

^{------------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Total households........... 24834
100.0 (X)}

^{Total
households with children......
16974 68.3 100.0}

^{Married couple family............. 14316
57.6 84.3}

^{Other family...................... 2587
10.4 15.2}

^{Male hholder, no wife present... 574
2.3 3.4}

^{Female hhldr, no husband present 2013
8.1 11.9}

^{Nonfamily household............... 71 .3 .4}

^{________________________________________________________________________}

^{SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File
1A, Tables 3 and 19.}

class=Section24>

^{Nearly 12 percent of children under 18
years were living in other family households in 1980 (Table 3.12), with the
majority, 83 percent, living in their mother's household rather than their
father's. Another 9 percent lived with
other relatives or nonrelatives: one parent may have resided with them, but not
as householder.}

class=Section25>

^{Table
3.11 Persons Under 18 by Household Type
and Relationship:}

^{1970 and 1980}

^{------------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Number Percent}

^{----------------- --------------}

^{1980 1970 1980
1970}

^{------------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Persons under 18 years 43604 38574 100.0 100.0}

^{In
household........................
43549 NA 99.9 NA}

^{Householder or spouse............. 48 NA .1 NA}

^{Own child of householder.......... 39490
36642 90.6 95.0}

^{In married couple family........ 34330
31117 78.7 80.7}

^{In other family................. 5160
5525 11.8 14.3}

^{________________________________________________________________________}

^{SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File
1A 1980 Table 17;}

^{PC80-1-B54 1980 Table 15; PC(1)-B54
1970 Tables 5 and 11.}

class=Section26>

class=Section27>

^{Table
3.12 Persons Under 18 By Household Type
and Relationship: 1980}

^{------------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{1980 Percent}

^{------------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Persons under 18 years..... 43604
100.0}

^{In
households.......................
43549 99.9}

^{Householder or spouse............. 48 .1}

^{Own child of householder.......... 39490
90.6}

^{In married couple family........ 34330
78.7}

^{In other family................. 5160
11.8}

^{Female householder............ 4294
9.8}

^{Male householder.............. 866
2.0}

^{Other relatives................... 3771
8.6}

^{Nonrelative....................... 240 .6}

^{In
group quarters...................
55 .1}

^{Inmate of institution............. 16
0.0}

^{Other............................. 39 .1}

^{________________________________________________________________________}

^{SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File
1A 1980 Table 17;}

^{PC80-1-B54 1980 Table 15; PC(1)-B54
1970 Tables 5 and 11.}

class=Section28>

^{In 1970, there were 12,021 husband/wife
families (out of 14,315 total families), and 1,354 female-headed families
(Table 3.13). Husband/wife families
represented 84 percent of total families; female-headed families were 10
percent of the total. The proportion of
married-couple families stayed nearly constant in 1980, at about 85 percent of
all families. The proportion of
female-headed families, however, had risen to 11 percent; the proportion of
male householders with no wife present decreased from 7 percent in 1970 to 4 percent
in 1980.}

class=Section29>

^{Table
3.13 Own Children Under 18 Years By
Family Type: 1970 and 1980}

^{---------------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Number Percent Percent}

^{------------
------------ ------------}

^{Persons 1980 1970
1980 1970 1980
1970}

^{---------------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Families................... 21780
14315 100.0 100.0
(X) (X)}

^{With own children under 18 yrs.. 15913
10895 73.1 76.1
(X) (X)}

^{Married
couple families.......... 18473 12021
84.8 84.0 100.0
100.0}

^{With own children under 18 yrs. 13770
9413   63.2   65.8
74.5   78.3}

^{Female
hhldr, no husband present. 2415 1354
11.1 9.5 100.0
100.0}

^{With own children under 18 yrs.   1727
919    7.9    6.4
71.5   67.9}

^{Male
hhlder, no wife present..... 892 940
4.1 6.6 100.0
100.0}

^{With own children under 18 yrs.    416
563    1.9    3.9
46.6   59.9}

^{___________________________________________________________________________}

^{SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-B54 1980
Table 15; PC(1)B54 1970}

^{Table 11}

class=Section30>

^{Of married-couple families in 1970,
9,413, or 78 percent, had children under 18 years living with them, compared to
68 percent of the female-headed families.
These percentages changed to 75 percent and 72 percent, respectively, in
1980.}

^{Persons 65 years and over made up almost 3
percent of the population in 1980 (Table 3.14). Over 88 percent of Guam's elderly lived in family households,
with 52 percent being the householder or their spouse.}

class=Section31>

^{Table
3.14 Persons 65 and Over By Household
Type and Relationship: 1980}

^{------------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Numbers Percent}

^{------------------------------------------------------------------------}

^{Persons 65 and over..... 2985 100.0}

^{In
family households.............
2638 88.4}

^{Householder.................... 1106 37.1}

^{Spouse......................... 444 14.9}

^{Other relative................. 1069 35.8}

^{Nonrelative.................... 19
.6}

^{In
nonfamily households..........
290 9.7}

^{Male householder............... 121 4.1}

^{Female householder............. 153 5.1}

^{Nonrelative.................... 16 .5}

^{In
Group quarters................
57 1.9}

^{Inmate of institution.......... 2 .1}

^{Other.......................... 55 1.8}

^{________________________________________________________________________}

^{SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File
1A 1980, Table 15}

^{and Table 20.}

class=Section32>

^{In 1980, 36 percent of the elderly lived
with relatives and just less than 1 percent stayed with nonrelatives in family
households. Of the remaining elderly,
10 percent were residing in nonfamily households, and 2 percent were
institutionalized. There are no
statistics about the elderly for Census years prior to 1980, so it is not known
whether these figures reflect large increases in the proportions of the population
over 65 who are living outside the family household, or who have been
institutionalized. Local experts in the
area of gerontology expect the proportions of elderly who have been
institutionalized to increase by 1990, after the opening of the island's first
senior care home (St. Dominic's) in 1987 (Guam Health Planning and Development
Agency 1985: 227-37; 1987). St.
Dominic's has a capacity of 60 beds, 36 of which were immediately filled with
elderly needing constant care when the Intermediate Care Facility of the Guam
Memorial Hospital was closed in 1987; an additional 4 beds have been filled in
1988.}

^SUMMARY

^{Guam is an island with households in
transition. The average household size
has decreased from over 5 persons per household to just over 4 persons over the
last 40 years, and the distribution of those households has moved from the
Central region to the North. The
southernmost area has consistently had the largest average size of households,
but the proportion of households located there has been steadily decreasing
since 1960.}

^{Household and family composition has also
changed over the years. Comparisons
made with data from the last 2 censuses show that the proportion of female
headed families is increasing, while the proportion of married couple families
is decreasing. The percentage of
married couple families with children under the age of 18 years has decreased
slightly, and a parallel increase of female headed families with children under
18 has occurred. This change seems to
show a shift from the island tradition of an extended family to one that,
whether by divorce or premarital childbearing, is headed by a single
female. The great majority of Guam's
elderly were living in family households in 1980, either in their own household
or with relatives.}

^{Should patterns in household size,
composition and distribution be consistent, the island may expect in the future
to have smaller households, with more single female heads of households, and a
continued shift to residences located
in the Northern region. The next Census
will allow us to see if these patterns continued from 1980 to 1990.}

CHAPTER 4

MARITAL STATUS

Marriage is an important indicator of socio‑cultural patterns in a society, particularly because the age pattern of marriage affects fertility. Usually, there is a relationship between age at first marriage and the number of children a woman will have, partly because earlier marriage gives more time for births and younger women tend to be more fertile than older women.

The data on marital status were derived from answers to question 6. The marital status classification referred to the status at the time of enumeration. Persons classified as "now married" included those who had been married only once and had never been widowed or divorced and those currently married persons who remarried after having been widowed or divorced. Consensually married persons were those living in a marital union without a civil or religious matrimonial contract and were included with those classified as now married; they were reported separately as "consensually married". Persons reported as "separated" were those living apart because of marital discord, with or without a legal separation. Persons whose only marriage had been annulled, and all persons under 15 years old were classified as "never married." All persons classified as "never married" are shown as "single" here.

When marital status was not reported, it was allocated according to the relationship to householder and sex and age of the person.

CHARACTERISTICS OF MARITAL STATUS

Between 1930 and 1980 the percentage of males who were never married decreased, but most of the decrease came between 1940 and 1960, and the data are obscured, once again, by the presence of the military and their dependents on island (Table 4.1). Between 1960 and 1980 there was almost no change in the proportion of males 15 years and over who had never married, about 1 in 3 males. The data for 1950 are clearly affected by the huge presence of the military in that year, many of whom had never married.

The percentage of married males showed the same fluctuations as the never married, but in the opposite direction. Between 1960 and 1980 about 6 in every 10 males were married. The percentage divorced remained small, but has been increasing with each census. On the other hand, the percentage of widowers, which was about 5 percent in 1930 and 1940, decreased to about 1 percent in 1960, and has remained there.

Table 4.1. Marital Status for Males: 1930 to 1980

Marital Status 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1930

Males, 15 yrs & over.. 36,408 30,978 25,319 32,572 6,158 5,673

Percent............. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Never married........... 33.3 34.1 34.4 55.1 42.4 46.9

Now married............. 62.2 61.7 61.9 39.7 51.6 47.8

Consensually married.. 1.6 .8 ... ... ... ...

Separated............... .9 .6 .6 (NA) (NA) (NA)

Divorced................ 2.3 2.2 1.5 (NA) .4 .4

Widowed................. 1.4 1.3 1.4 (NA) 5.6 4.8

___________________________________________________________________________

Note: 1970 and 1950 data for persons 14 years and over; for 1930 to

1950 "separated" included in "now married"; for 1950, 1698

widowed/divorced males included in total.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Census Reports

The percentage of never married females has not seen the dramatic changes the males experienced because few of the females were in the military (Table 4.2). For all censuses through the years, the percentage of never married females has been less than comparable males, partly because of the large number of single males in the military. There has been a general downward trend in the percentage of never married females, with glitches in 1940 and again in 1970.

The "now married" segment shows the inverse trend, as with the males. The percentage of divorced females remained at 1 percent or less until 1980 when it jumped to more than 3 percent; the percentage of widows also decreased from more than 10 percent in 1930 and 1940 to about 5 percent in 1970 and 1980.

Table 4.2. Marital Status for Females: 1930 to 1980

Marital Status 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1930

Females, 15 yrs & over 32,599 22,241 14,483 11,561 6,298 5,065

Percent............. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Never married........... 26.2 29.6 23.1 31.5 39.0 35.7

Now married............. 63.4 63.4 67.7 59.0 50.3 53.0

Consensually married.. 1.6 .7 ... ... ... ...

Separated............... 1.3 .9 1.1 (NA) (NA) (NA)

Divorced................ 3.5 1.1 1.1 (NA) .3 .4

Widowed................. 5.5 4.9 6.8 (NA) 10.3 10.8

___________________________________________________________________________

Note: 1970 and 1950 data for persons 14 years and over; for 1930 to

1950 "separated" included in "now married"; for 1950, 1091

widowed/divorced females included in total.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

Tables 4.3 and 4.4 show more the recent trends by sex. For males, the percent change for separated and consensually married persons has been much greater than the change for all males. Some of the change may be due to different interpretations for these categories, and the definitions for separated and consensually married may be ambiguous to some respondents.

Table 4.3. Marital Status for Males: 1970 and 1980

Percent

Number Change Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ 1970 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Marital Status 1980 1970 1980 1980 1970

Males, 15 yrs & over.. 36,408 30,978 17.5 100.0 100.0

Never married........... 12,122 10,559 14.8 33.3 34.1

Now married............. 22,637 19,120 18.4 62.2 61.7

Consensually married.. 581 252 130.6 1.6 .8

Separated............... 320 190 68.4 .9 .6

Divorced................ 825 697 18.4 2.3 2.2

Widowed................. 504 412 22.3 1.4 1.3

________________________________________________________________________

Note: 1970 data are for persons 14 years and over.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑B54 1980, Table 15, PC(1)‑B54,

Table 6

The percentage changes for females were larger than for males between 1970 and 1980. Although the number of females 15 years and over increased by about one‑third between 1970 and 1980, the percent divorced jumped by 78 percent, and consensually married females increased by more than 70 percent. Also, separated females increased by about 50 percent.

Table 4.4. Marital Status for Females: 1970 and 1980

Percent

Number Change Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ 1970 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Marital Status 1980 1970 1980 1980 1970

Females, 15 yrs & over 32,599 22,241 46.6 100.0 100.0

Never married........... 8,553 6,593 29.7 26.2 29.6

Now married............. 20,670 14,093 46.7 63.4 63.4

Consensually married.. 529 151 250.3 1.6 .7

Separated............... 414 208 99.0 1.3 .9

Divorced................ 1,155 252 358.3 3.5 1.1

Widowed................. 1,807 1,095 65.0 5.5 4.9

________________________________________________________________________

Note: 1970 data are for persons 14 years and over.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑B54 1980, Table 15,

PC(1)‑B54, Table 6

There was very little difference in the distribution of civilian and military persons (defined on the basis of a military person in the household) in 1980. The percentage of never married military males was insignificantly higher than for civilians. A higher percentage of civilians than military males were consensually married, and a larger percentage were widowed. Although 73 percent of the adult male population was civilian, 93 percent of the consensually married males were civilian, as were 94 percent of the widowers.

Table 4.5. Marital Status of Males by Civilian/Military Dependent Status:

1980

Numbers Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Percent

Civi‑ Mili‑ Civi‑ Mili‑ Civi‑

Marital Status Total lian tary lian tary lian

Males, 15 yrs & over.. 36,408 26,530 9,878 100.0 100.0 72.9

Never married........... 12,122 8,746 3,376 33.0 34.2 72.1

Now married............. 22,637 16,483 6,154 62.1 62.3 72.8

Consensually married.. 581 538 43 2.0 .4 92.6

Separated............... 320 221 99 .8 1.0 69.1

Divorced................ 825 605 220 2.3 2.2 73.3

Widowed................. 504 475 29 1.8 .3 94.2

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 19.

The marital distribution by civilian and military status for females differed somewhat from the males (Table 4.6). Military females were more likely to be married than civilian females, probably because females in military households are more likely to be the wives of military men than males are to be the husbands of military females. For all other categories, civilian females were present in larger percentages than for the whole population (with more than 90 percent).

Table 4.6. Marital Status of Females by Civilian/Military Dependent Status:

1980

Numbers Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Percent

Civi‑ Mili‑ Civi‑ Mili‑ Civi‑

Marital Status Total lian tary lian tary lian

Females, 15 yrs & over 32,599 26,562 6,037 100.0 100.0 81.5

Never married........... 8,553 7,806 747 29.4 12.4 91.3

Now married............. 20,670 15,581 5,089 58.7 84.3 75.4

Consensually married.. 529 488 41 1.8 .7 92.2

Separated............... 414 396 18 1.5 .3 95.7

Divorced................ 1,155 1,068 87 4.0 1.4 92.5

Widowed................. 1,807 1,711 96 6.4 1.6 94.7

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 19.

Data on marital status by age were not tabulated in 1970. When compared to the 1960 data, the 1980 data show that males tended to get married at slightly younger ages than in the earlier census (Table 4.7). The Singulate Mean Age at Marriage (SMAM) (Hajnal 1954) is derived by an indirect technique to obtain the average age at first marriage for a population or group. The average age at first marriage for males on Guam in 1980 was 24.5 years (about the same as the 24.9 years reported for the 1960 census).

The number of single males between 30 and 49 years old decreased between 1960 and 1980, while the number of younger and older males increased. Much of this decrease can probably be attributed to military males leaving the island, and not being replaced.

Table 4.7. Percent Never Married by Age for Males: 1960 and 1980

Percent Percent of all

Number Change Persons this Age

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ 1960 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group 1980 1960 1980 1980 1960

Males, 15 yrs & over.. 12,122 8,715 39.1 33.3 34.4

15 to 19 years.......... 5,667 2,920 94.1 96.9 95.6

20 to 24 years.......... 3,774 3,036 24.3 62.7 67.1

25 to 29 years.......... 1,319 989 33.4 25.4 29.2

30 to 34 years.......... 554 876 ‑36.8 11.4 19.4

35 to 39 years.......... 251 381 ‑34.1 7.4 11.1

40 to 44 years.......... 156 172 ‑9.3 5.9 7.9

45 to 49 years.......... 110 113 ‑2.6 5.1 6.7

50 to 54 years.......... 106 93 14.0 4.7 9.0

55 to 59 years.......... 80 50 60.0 4.9 7.8

60 years and over....... 105 85 23.5 4.4 10.0

SMAM.................... ... ... ... 24.5 24.9

________________________________________________________________________

Source: 1980 Unpublished data and 1960 Census, Table 13.

The Singulate Mean Age at Marriage for females in 1960 was 20.5 years, which increased to 22.1 years in 1980 (Table 4.8). Unlike the males, the percentage of never married females increased for all ages. As the singulate mean age of first marriage indicates, it is likely that females are delaying first marriage to finish schooling or to enter the labor force because the proportions never married have changed considerably. While only 32 percent of the 20 to 24 year old females in 1960 had never married, this percentage had increased to 40 percent in 1980.

Table 4.8. Percent Never Married by Age for Females: 1960 to 1980

Percent Percent of all

Number Change Persons this Age

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ 1960 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group 1980 1960 1980 1980 1960

Females, 15 yrs & over 8,553 3,351 155.2 26.2 23.1

15 to 19 years.......... 4,635 1,690 174.3 90.1 87.1

20 to 24 years.......... 2,039 713 186.0 40.1 32.2

25 to 29 years.......... 780 266 193.2 15.2 12.2

30 to 34 years.......... 344 175 96.6 7.8 8.4

35 to 39 years.......... 169 123 37.4 5.9 7.2

40 to 44 years.......... 159 112 42.0 6.6 9.1

45 to 49 years.......... 94 80 17.5 4.7 8.4

50 to 54 years.......... 98 69 42.0 5.6 9.9

55 to 59 years.......... 66 41 61.0 5.2 7.8

60 years and over....... 169 82 106.1 6.8 8.8

SMAM.................... ... ... ... 22.1 20.5

________________________________________________________________________

Source: 1980 Unpublished data and 1960 Census Report, Table 13.

Using vital statistics data to compute mean age at first marriage for the years 1981 through 1985 yields slightly higher results (Table 4.9). The mean age at first marriage for females was 24.1 years in 1981, decreased to 23.9 years in 1982, then increased and decreased again in 1983 and 1984. In 1986, it was 24.3 years. The mean age at first marriage for males was 26.3 years in 1981, decreased to 25.7 years in 1982, rose to 26.7 years in 1983, then steadily decreased to 25.9 years in 1985.

Table 4.9. Mean Age at First Marriage by Sex: Guam, 1981 to 1985

1981‑

Sex 1985 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985

Male 26.4 26.3 25.7 26.7 26.4 25.9

Female 24.4 24.1 23.9 24.6 24.3 24.3

______________________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPHSS.

CONSENSUAL MARRIAGE

Use of "consensually" married on the questionnaire is somewhat problematic because there is no generally agreed upon definition of what constitutes a consensual union. As noted previously, for 1980, the Census Bureau defined a consensual marriage as a couple who were "living in a marital union without a civil or religious matrimonial contract". It is likely, however, that respondents and enumerators did not always use this definition to decide on marital status of individuals in the census.

In traditional Micronesian societies, marriage was not necessarily formalized by a religious ceremony, and persons sometimes moved into and out of unions over the years. Although many marriages among Chamorros were formalized after Hispanization by the Catholic Church, not all marriages were then or are now formalized. Nonetheless, it is not clear that the Census is the best instrument for collecting data on this subject.

Altogether 581 of the 22,637 (3 percent) of the married males in 1980 were in consensual unions (Table 4.10). Although more than 11 percent of the married males 15 to 19 years old and 5 percent of those 20 to 24 were married consensually, the percentages dropped off after that. Males in consensual unions, then, tended to be younger than those who were in regular unions, that is, the younger the male, the more likely he was to be consensually married.

These data indicate that there may be problems in interpreting "consensual" marriage. Since these unions do not seem to persist into middle age, consensual union might be better classified as "trial" marriage. If "consensual" marriage is fully categorized by the Census Bureau definition, then it is very different from non‑consensual unions, at least in terms of age. If the government of Guam is to use the data on consensual marriage for planning and policy use, a re‑definition may be necessary, or at least a more thorough evaluation by a survey may be required.

Table 4.10. Consensually Married Males by Age: 1980

Number Percent Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Consen‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All Consen‑ sually All Consen‑

Age Group Married sually Married Married sually

Males, 15 yrs & over.. 22,637 581 2.6 100.0 100.0

15 to 19 years.......... 176 20 11.4 .8 3.4

20 to 24 years.......... 2,142 113 5.3 9.5 19.4

25 to 29 years.......... 3,653 118 3.2 16.1 20.3

30 to 34 years.......... 4,087 93 2.3 18.1 16.0

35 to 44 years.......... 5,302 122 2.3 23.4 21.0

45 to 54 years.......... 3,921 65 1.7 17.3 11.2

55 to 59 years.......... 1,453 24 1.7 6.4 4.1

60 to 64 years.......... 856 19 2.2 3.8 3.3

65 years and over....... 1,047 7 .7 4.6 1.2

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 19.

The data for females in consensual unions were similar to the data for males (Table 4.11). Again, about 3 percent of the marriages were consensual, and the trend by age was similar to that found among the men.

Table 4.11. Consensually Married Females by Age: 1980

Number Percent Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Consen‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All Consen‑ sually All Consen‑

Age Group Married sually Married Married sually

Females, 15 + years... 20,670 529 2.6 100.0 100.0

15 to 19 years.......... 490 56 11.4 2.4 10.6

20 to 24 years.......... 2,866 168 5.9 13.9 31.8

25 to 29 years.......... 4,034 100 2.5 19.5 18.9

30 to 34 years.......... 3,740 77 2.1 18.1 14.6

35 to 44 years.......... 4,405 70 1.6 21.3 13.2

45 to 54 years.......... 3,003 35 1.2 14.5 6.6

55 to 59 years.......... 935 12 1.3 4.5 2.3

60 to 64 years.......... 608 5 .8 2.9 .9

65 years and over....... 589 6 1.0 2.8 1.1

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 19.

More than half of the consensual unions for males were of males born on Guam, compared to only 3 in 10 of all marriages, although these were only 4 percent of all the marriages for males born on Guam (Table 4.12). Micronesians were more likely to be in consensual unions than Asians or persons born in other places, with Palauans and Other Micronesians having more than 5 percent of their marriages being consensual. On the other hand, males born in the United States and Philippines had very low rates of consensual unions; in fact, although marriages to males born in the U.S. were 30 percent of all marriages, they were only 16 percent of the consensual unions.

Table 4.12. Consensually Married Males by Birthplace: 1980

Number Percent Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Consen‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All Consen‑ sually All Consen‑

Birthplace Married sually Married Married sually

Males, 15 yrs & over.. 22,637 581 2.6 100.0 100.0

Guam.................... 6,738 306 4.5 29.8 52.7

Northern Mariana Is..... 409 19 4.6 1.8 3.3

Palau................... 206 11 5.3 .9 1.9

Other Micronesia........ 99 5 5.1 .4 .9

Asia.................... 7,237 134 1.9 32.0 23.1

Japan and Okinawa..... 296 4 1.4 1.3 .7

Philippines........... 6,104 66 1.1 27.0 11.4

United States........... 6,725 91 1.4 29.7 15.7

Elsewhere and N.S....... 1,223 15 1.2 5.4 2.6

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24.

Finally, 61 percent of all of the female consensual marriages were of females born on Guam, compared to 37 percent of all marriages for females born on Guam (Table 4.13). Once again, Palau (8 percent) and Other Micronesia (6 percent) had the highest percentage of consensual unions, while United States and Asia had the lowest percentages. Although Asians made up 32 percent of all marriages, they were only 12 percent of the consensual unions.

Table 4.13. Consensually Married Females by Birthplace: 1980

Number Percent Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Consen‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All Consen‑ sually All Consen‑

Birthplace Married sually Married Married sually

Females, 15 + yrs..... 20,670 529 2.6 100.0 100.0

Guam.................... 7,658 325 4.2 37.0 61.4

Northern Mariana Is..... 463 25 5.4 2.2 4.7

Palau................... 275 23 8.4 1.3 4.3

Other Micronesia........ 107 7 6.5 .5 1.3

Asia.................... 6,725 62 .9 32.5 11.7

Japan and Okinawa..... 707 6 .8 3.4 1.1

Philippines........... 4,882 22 .5 23.6 4.2

United States........... 4,759 69 1.4 23.0 13.0

Elsewhere and N.S....... 683 18 2.6 3.3 3.4

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24.

MARITAL STATUS BY REGION

For 1980, the Northern and Southern regions had basically similar percentages of single persons, 27.3 and 29.4 percent, respectively (Table 4.14). Piti, with 40.8 percent, and Umatac, with 38.0 percent, had the highest percentages of single persons in relation to their respective election district populations. These election districts had relatively small populations: Piti had a total population of 2,368 and Umatac had the island's lowest population with 405.

Similar population composition is seen in the "now married" category with the Northern region showing 66.6 percent and the Southern area with 65.1 percent of their respective total populations currently married. The election district of Santa Rita in the South had the highest percentage of married persons with 73.4 percent of its total. Sinajana, a moderately populated village in the Central region, had the lowest with 52.7 percent.

Table 4.14. Marital Status of Persons 15+ Years by Election District

Guam: 1980

Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Now

Election District Total Total Single Marrd Widwd Divrcd

Guam................. 69007 100.0 30.0 63.8 3.3 2.9

North................. 31166 100.0 27.3 66.6 3.0 3.1

Dededo................... 14591 100.0 27.8 66.6 3.2 2.4

Tamuning................. 9768 100.0 26.8 65.2 3.3 4.6

Yigo..................... 6807 100.0 27.0 68.8 1.9 2.2

Central.............. 23167 100.0 33.8 59.2 3.7 3.2

Agana.................... 673 100.0 33.9 57.2 4.0 4.9

Agana Heights............ 2244 100.0 34.8 56.0 5.1 4.1

Asan..................... 1389 100.0 28.9 63.6 4.4 3.1

Barrigada................ 5176 100.0 34.2 60.1 3.4 2.3

Chalan Pago‑Ordot........ 1878 100.0 32.6 60.8 4.4 2.2

Mangilao................. 4412 100.0 30.1 63.7 2.7 3.4

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite...... 3450 100.0 33.9 58.1 3.6 4.4

Piti..................... 2368 100.0 40.8 54.8 1.9 2.6

Sinajana................. 1577 100.0 36.8 52.7 7.1 3.4

South................ 14674 100.0 29.4 65.1 3.6 2.0

Agat..................... 2477 100.0 33.2 59.3 5.0 2.5

Inarajan................. 1206 100.0 36.3 57.5 5.1 1.1

Merizo................... 998 100.0 33.4 58.4 5.7 2.5

Santa Rita............... 5934 100.0 23.5 73.4 1.8 1.4

Talofofo................. 1183 100.0 34.4 59.6 3.8 2.2

Umatac................... 405 100.0 38.0 53.1 7.4 1.5

Yona..................... 2461 100.0 31.2 62.1 4.0 2.6

_____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980 Table 26.

All three regions had about the same percentages for those widowed: North had 3.0 percent, Central 3.7 percent and South 3.6 percent. The village of Umatac had the highest percentage with 7.4 percent of its total being widowed.

Divorces were low in 1980 with an overall of 3 percent for all districts. The village of Agana with the second lowest population of 673 showed the highest rate of divorced persons at 5 percent, followed by Tamuning, the second highest in population at 9,768, with 5 percent divorced.

So far, in this chapter, we have given a brief overview of marriage patterns from recent decennial censuses. These data will now be analyzed with reference to vital statistics.

VITAL STATISTICS

Data obtained from vital statistics are shown for the six year period 1980 through 1985 for the following section of this chapter. In the later portion, a five year period, 1978 through 1982, is discussed.

Chamorro grooms comprised between 19 percent and 25 percent of the cohort totals for the years 1980 to 1985 (Table 4.15). Their numbers rose slightly between 1980 and 1982 (a total of 32), and then increased dramatically in 1983 by 48. However, the following year there was a sharp decrease from 390 to 313. In 1985, their numbers increased again considerably, from 313 to 359, a gain of 46 grooms.

Table 4.15. Marriage by Race of Groom: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 1498 1382 1653 1393 1480 1636

Chamorro.......... 359 313 390 342 308 310

Caucasian......... 401 293 287 274 264 284

Filipino.......... 221 229 152 147 204 216

Micronesian....... 36 36 28 30 30 26

Negro............. 79 70 66 55 56 40

Japanese.......... 279 320 598 429 492 670

Chinese........... 10 11 8 4 8 10

Other Asian....... 20 17 13 15 15 4

All Others........ 93 93 111 97 103 76

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports,Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

Table 4.16. Percent Marriage by Race of Groom: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Chamorro.......... 24.0 22.6 23.6 24.6 20.8 18.9

Caucasian......... 26.8 21.2 17.4 19.7 17.8 17.4

Filipino.......... 14.8 16.6 9.2 10.6 13.8 13.2

Micronesian....... 2.4 2.6 1.7 2.2 2.0 1.6

Negro............. 5.3 5.1 4.0 3.9 3.8 2.4

Japanese.......... 18.6 23.2 36.2 30.8 33.2 41.0

Chinese........... .7 .8 .5 .3 .5 .6

Other Asian....... 1.3 1.2 .8 1.1 1.0 .2

All Others........ 6.2 6.7 6.7 7.0 7.0 4.6

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports,Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

The percentage of Chamorro brides, as compared to Chamorro grooms, showed even greater stability over the six‑year period (Table 4.17). There was a gain of 4 percentage points, from 26 in 1980 to 30 in 1981. There was a slight increase of 2 percentage points the following year. In 1983, the percentage dipped slightly to 28, only to rise again in 1984 to 29 and then to 30 in 1985. Chamorro brides appeared to follow a trend similar to that of Chamorro grooms. With the exception of 1981, where the number of grooms was less than that of 1980, brides showed a steady increase to a peak in 1982 and 1983. Both showed their highest count in 1983: 462 Chamorro brides and 390 Chamorro grooms.

Table 4.17. Marriage by Race of Bride: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 1498 1382 1653 1393 1480 1636

Chamorro.......... 442 406 462 444 436 418

Caucasian......... 206 161 180 193 184 181

Filipino.......... 332 284 208 153 195 198

Micronesian....... 63 46 62 46 41 47

Negro............. 34 34 26 29 19 14

Japanese.......... 300 349 605 442 496 683

Chinese........... 9 7 8 2 10 7

Other Asian....... 12 8 5 9 9 0

All Others........ 100 87 97 75 90 88

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

Table 4.18. Percent Marriage by Race of Bride: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Chamorro.......... 29.5 29.4 27.9 31.9 29.5 25.6

Caucasian......... 13.8 11.6 10.9 13.9 12.4 11.1

Filipino.......... 22.2 20.5 12.6 11.0 13.2 12.1

Micronesian....... 4.2 3.3 3.8 3.3 2.8 2.9

Negro............. 2.3 2.5 1.6 2.1 1.3 .9

Japanese.......... 20.0 25.3 36.6 31.7 33.5 41.7

Chinese........... .6 .5 .5 .1 .7 .4

Other Asian....... .8 .6 .3 .6 .6 0.0

All Others........ 6.5 6.1 5.7 5.4 6.1 5.1

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

Caucasian grooms outnumbered any other race in 1985 with a total of 401. However, prior years showed considerably lower totals; the next greatest total was 293 in 1984, and the lowest was 264 in 1981 for this racial group. Caucasian brides also showed their highest total in 1985 with 206, although they were the fourth highest ethnic group reported.

The Office of Vital Statistics does not report military marriages specifically, although some tables in the Annual Statistical Report indicate marriages that took place in a military area. One explanation for the large increase in Caucasian marriages might be that Guam became a homeport for a few Naval vessels and, conceivably, marriages occurred to military personnel while they were homeported here. The effect of the military ‑ including reservists ‑ on marriage cannot be ascertained without more specific data. Perhaps the inclusion of specified tables on military marriages in the Annual Statistical Report will help.

There was a greater number of Filipino brides than Filipino grooms in 1985. In 1980, the situation was reversed, with Filipino grooms slightly exceeding the number of Filipino brides: 216 grooms in 1980 as compared to 198 brides, whereas in 1985 there were 332 Filipino brides compared to 221 grooms. A plausible explanation for the relatively low number of marriages in these groups is that there is probably a high degree of selective female migration to Hawaii and the U.S. mainland, where migrants acquire jobs as nurses, domestic laborers, farm helpers, etc.

The other racial groups had fewer brides and grooms, except for Japanese, who showed consistently higher figures than most ethnic groups in the six‑year period. The Japanese, however, have very little impact on the population of Guam, since they come here to marry, honeymoon, and then return to Japan.

For both sexes, all of the large racial groups (Chamorro, Filipino, and Caucasian) showed tremendous increases in the number of divorces in 1985 as compared to 1984 (Tables 4.19 through 4.22), or any previous year.

Table 4.19. Divorces by Race of Husband: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 899 622 617 508 382 521

Chamorro.......... 202 133 125 103 100 103

Micronesian....... 20 14 15 11 7 14

Caucasian......... 305 170 184 191 132 180

Filipino.......... 203 125 121 112 98 165

Negro............. 53 29 17 16 8 18

Japanese.......... 10 6 4 3 3 2

Chinese........... 4 2 8 2 1 6

Other Asian....... 32 26 42 42 18 25

All Others........ 48 49 32 13 11 6

Not Reported...... 22 68 69 15 4 2

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

Caucasian husbands had the highest divorce totals ‑ both in numbers and percents ‑ consistently throughout the five year period. However, Caucasian wives ranked second to Chamorro wives for the same period.

Table 4.20. Divorces by Race of Wife: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 899 622 617 508 382 521

Chamorro.......... 232 180 178 138 122 132

Micronesian....... 22 16 17 15 10 16

Caucasian......... 227 140 122 147 94 133

Filipino.......... 212 108 108 96 87 152

Negro............. 36 18 13 14 4 7

Japanese.......... 20 10 14 3 5 5

Chinese........... 4 3 4 1 1 7

Other Asian....... 41 33 56 66 47 60

All Others........ 81 50 38 10 8 7

Not Reported...... 24 64 67 18 4 2

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

Filipino husbands and wives tended to parallel each other over the five year period. Both sexes showed a drop in divorces between 1980 and 1981, and then a gradual increase afterward.

Table 4.21. Percent Divorces by Race of Husband: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Chamorro.......... 22.5 21.4 20.3 20.3 26.2 19.8

Micronesian....... 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.2 1.8 2.7

Caucasian......... 33.9 27.3 29.8 37.6 34.6 34.5

Filipino.......... 22.6 20.1 19.6 22.0 25.7 31.7

Negro............. 5.9 4.7 2.8 3.1 2.1 3.5

Japanese.......... 1.1 1.0 .6 .6 .8 .4

Chinese........... .4 .3 1.3 .4 .3 1.2

Other Asian....... 3.6 4.2 6.8 8.3 4.7 4.8

All Others........ 5.3 7.9 5.2 2.6 2.9 1.2

Not Reported...... 2.4 10.9 11.2 3.0 1.0 .4

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

Again, due to the transitory nature of the Japanese ‑ that is, they merely marry on Guam and then go elsewhere ‑ their divorce rate remained quite low, as was the case with the other Asians, particularly Chinese.

Table 4.22. Percent Divorces by Race of Wife: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Chamorro.......... 25.8 28.9 28.8 27.2 31.9 25.3

Micronesian....... 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 2.6 3.1

Caucasian......... 25.3 22.5 19.8 28.9 24.6 25.5

Filipino.......... 23.6 17.4 17.5 18.9 22.8 29.2

Negro............. 4.0 2.9 2.1 2.8 1.0 1.3

Japanese.......... 2.2 1.6 2.3 .6 1.3 1.0

Chinese........... .4 .5 .6 .2 .3 1.3

Other Asian....... 4.6 5.3 9.1 13.0 12.3 11.5

All Others........ 9.0 8.0 6.2 2.0 2.1 1.3

Not Reported...... 2.7 10.3 10.9 3.5 1.0 .4

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

In this segment of the discussion on marriage, data obtained from the Office of Vital Statistics will cover the five year period between 1978 and 1982.

From 1978 to 1980 (Table 4.23), more Caucasian grooms chose brides of other races. In the following two years, 1981 and 1982, the "Other" racial grooms exceeded Caucasians by a discernably small percentage: 16.0 percent in 1981 and 7.2 percent in 1982.

Table 4.23. Marriages by Race of Bride and Race of Groom : 1978 to 1982

Groom's Race

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Bride Same Bride Not Same

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year Total Total Cham Fil Cauc Other Total Cham Fil Cauc Other

1982... 1393 999 277 84 146 492 394 65 63 128 138

1981... 1480 1054 249 115 137 553 426 59 89 127 151

1980... 1634 1221 248 118 136 719 413 62 98 148 105

1979... 1766 1319 258 148 147 766 447 67 112 142 126

1978... 1767 1423 284 150 153 836 344 47 74 140 83

Percent

1982... 100.0 27.7 8.4 14.6 49.2 100.0 16.5 16.0 32.5 35.0

1981... 100.0 23.6 10.9 13.0 52.5 100.0 13.8 20.9 29.8 35.4

1980... 100.0 20.3 9.7 11.1 58.9 100.0 15.0 23.7 35.8 25.4

1979... 100.0 19.6 11.2 11.1 58.1 100.0 15.0 25.1 31.8 28.2

1978... 100.0 20.0 10.5 10.8 58.7 100.0 13.7 21.5 40.7 24.1

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

The number of Caucasian grooms taking brides of another race was greater than the number of same‑race marriages in 1980 (Table 4.24). This did not occur in any other racial group for the five year period.

Table 4.24. Marriages of Caucasian Grooms by Race of Bride,

Guam: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Caucasian Grooms Race of Bride

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year Number Percent Chamorro Filipino Caucasian Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1982..... 274 100.0 16.8 11.3 53.3 18.6

1981..... 264 100.0 13.6 15.9 51.9 18.6

1980..... 284 100.0 18.0 13.0 47.9 21.1

1979..... 289 100.0 16.6 12.1 50.9 20.4

1978..... 293 100.0 17.7 11.9 52.2 18.1

_______________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

There was a slight decrease in the number of same‑race marriages for Chamorros which occurred between 1978 and 1981, but the number rose again in 1982 to 277 (Table 4.25).

Table 4.25. Marriages of Chamorro Grooms by Race of Bride,

Guam: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Chamorro Grooms Race of Bride

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year Number Percent Chamorro Filipino Caucasian Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1982..... 342 100.0 81.0 6.4 4.4 8.2

1981..... 308 100.0 80.8 8.8 3.9 6.5

1980..... 310 100.0 80.0 7.4 5.8 6.8

1979..... 325 100.0 79.4 5.5 6.5 8.6

1978..... 331 100.0 85.8 4.5 2.4 7.3

_______________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

There was a marked (39 percent) decrease of Filipino grooms from 204 in 1981 to 147 in 1982. This group experienced a slight increase from 1978 to 1979, but then the figure dropped significantly in 1980: from 260 in 1979 to 216 in 1980, a decrease of 20.4 percent.

Table 4.26. Marriages of Filipino Grooms by Race of Bride,

Guam: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Filipino Grooms Race of Bride

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year Number Percent Chamorro Filipino Caucasian Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1982..... 147 100.0 29.9 57.1 3.4 9.5

1981..... 204 100.0 34.3 56.4 4.9 4.4

1980..... 216 100.0 32.4 54.6 6.0 6.9

1979..... 260 100.0 32.7 56.9 5.0 5.4

1978..... 224 100.0 21.0 67.0 5.8 6.2

_______________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

Grooms of "Other" races showed a marked downward trend between 1978 and 1982, from 919 grooms to 630 (Table 4.27).

Table 4.27. Marriages of Other Race Grooms by Race of Bride,

Guam: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Other Grooms Race of Bride

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year Number Percent Chamorro Filipino Caucasian Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1982..... 630 100.0 12.2 2.5 4.3 81.0

1981..... 704 100.0 11.5 1.6 3.6 83.4

1980..... 824 100.0 5.9 2.4 1.7 89.9

1979..... 892 100.0 5.9 3.0 2.1 88.9

1978..... 919 100.0 4.9 1.1 1.5 92.5

_______________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

SUMMARY

From looking at both census and vital statistics data, it is apparent that both marriage and divorce are on the rise. It has been estimated in the U.S. that the divorce rate is approaching 50 percent, that one out of every two marriages will end in divorce. On Guam, at least from 1978 to 1985, the rate of divorce was not that high, though it was rising. Between the 1970 and 1980 censuses, the number of divorced males rose 16 percent, while divorced females increased by 78 percent. There was also an increase in the number of separated males (41 percent) and females (50 percent).

Between 1960 and 1980, age at first marriage increased by 8 percent for females, showing that females were delaying their first marriage, probably to finish schooling or enter the labor force.

By region, Central had the highest percentages of single, widowed, and divorced persons; North had the most married. By village, Piti had the most single persons, Santa Rita the greatest married, Umatac the most widowed, and Agana the most divorced.

From 1980 to 1984, Japanese men comprised the greatest percentage of grooms, but this was true of Japanese brides for only 1980 and 1981. Chamorros were the second most likely group to get married between 1980 and 1985, followed closely by Caucasians.

Between 1980 and 1985, Caucasian males were the group most likely to get divorced; Chinese males the least likely. For females, Chamorros had the highest rate of divorce (except for 1980 when it was the Filipinos), for all years, Chinese women were least likely.

Same‑race marriages from 1978 to 1982 seemed to be more common for those belonging to "Other" races than for the 3 largest groups (Chamorro, Filipino, Caucasian). However, when "Others" are removed from consideration, Chamorros were more likely to marry others of their own race. Caucasians generally had the highest rates of mixed race marriages, but this could often backfire: they also had the highest rates of mixed race divorces. Same race divorces, however, outnumbered mixed race divorces in all years.

Since marriage and divorce are events that can happen more than once to a person, and are not as limited by age as fertility is, they are not as easy to work with as other demographic events are. The snapshots provided by census and vital register data can only scratch the surface of what is a fascinating area of human behavior.

CHAPTER 5

FERTILITY

Fertility is of vital interest in the field of demography, in light of the role it plays in giving shape to age‑sex structure and in producing the alteration in the size of a population. The age distribution of a population is more sensitive to changes in fertility behavior than to changes in mortality. The proportion of a population that is young or old depends mainly on the birth rate and not on the death rate, because as people live longer, the population structure, as a whole, becomes older rather than younger. A population has an increasing proportion of older people when the birth rates have fallen and not because the death rates have fallen. Any decline in mortality makes the age distribution younger as more children survive. The decline of mortality has very little effect at middle ages. On the other hand, any decline in fertility necessarily makes the population older since it reduces the proportion of children.

Measures of fertility quantify the birth performance of a population over a period of time. These measures can be used to compare the fertility levels of a number of populations during a particular time interval to exhibit a time trend in fertility in a population.

Fertility measures include crude birth rate, gross fertility rate, general fertility rate, and rate of reproduction.

Analysis of fertility trends in the Pacific is not abundant, and Guam is no exception. Although Guam has had regular censuses, and a great deal of information has been collected, there has been no systematic look at the fertility trends until recently (Levin and Retherford 1986).

The data for children ever born in 1980 were derived from the answers to question 21a (How many babies has ___ ever had, not including stillbirths?), which was asked of women 15 years old and over, regardless of marital status. Still‑births, stepchildren, and adopted children were excluded. Ever‑married women were instructed to include all children born to them before and during their most recent marriage, children no longer living, and children away from home, as well as children who were still at home. Never‑married women were instructed to include all children born to them. Data on children ever born reported by never‑married women should be viewed with caution because of the very high rates of nonresponse to the question and the anticipated underreporting of live births to these women.

In the 1980 census, a terminal category of "15 or more" was used for recording the number of children ever born. For purposes of computing the total number of children ever born, the terminal category was given a mean value of 15.

The data on the number of children still living were derived from answers to question 21b (How many of these children are still living?), which was asked of all women 15 years old and over who reported having had at least one child ever born in question 21a. For the purposes of computing the total number of children still living, the terminal category "15 and over" was given a mean value of 15. In addition, all women 15 years old and over who reported having had a child were also asked in question 21c if any children were born since April 1, 1979. Although the data were collected for women past age 50, subsequent editing procedures only accepted a "Yes" response for women 15 to 50 years old. Neither of these two questions had been asked in prior decennial censuses.

FERTILITY CHARACTERISTICS

In 1980, there were 2,517 children ever born per 1,000 women 15 years and over in Guam, and 2,391 children still living per 1,000 women (Table 5.1). Another way of stating this is that the average woman had had 2.5 children ever born, and 2.4 still alive. Until the 55 to 59 year age group, there was a direct correlation between age and number of children ever born, that is, the older the age group of women, the higher the fertility. Of course, many of the young women had not finished their fertility and, in the case of the 15 to 19 year old women, many had not even started to have children.

Table 5.1. Children Ever Born, Still Alive, and Children Born in the

Last Year: 1980

Numbers Per 1000 Women

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Children Children Births Children Children Births

Ever Still Previous Ever Still Previous

Age Group Females Born Alive Year Born Alive Year

Total..... 32,599 82,040 77,935 ... 2,517 2,391 ...

15 to 19 yrs. 5,144 613 600 247 119 117 48

20 to 24 yrs. 5,089 4,144 4,079 885 814 802 174

25 to 29 yrs. 5,130 8,394 8,224 897 1,636 1,603 175

30 to 34 yrs. 4,435 10,865 10,645 505 2,450 2,400 114

35 to 44 yrs. 5,259 18,875 18,325 275 3,589 3,485 52

45 to 54 yrs. 3,763 18,437 17,657 ... 4,900 4,692 ...

55 to 59 yrs. 1,280 6,644 6,251 ... 5,191 4,884 ...

60 to 64 yrs. 919 4,925 4,524 ... 5,359 4,923 ...

65 + yrs..... 1,580 9,143 7,630 ... 5,787 4,829 ...

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, 1980 Table 19.

For those women who had probably completed their fertility, there is evidence of a fertility decline. Women in the 35 to 44 year old age group had 3,589 children per 1,000 women, compared to 4,900 for women 45 to 54 and 5,191 for women 55 to 59. Women who were 55 to 59 years old had had an average of about 5.2 children ever born, while those 45 to 54 had 4.9, and the 35 to 44 aged women had 3.6. While a slight decline of 0.3 children per woman is evident between the 55 to 59 year old women and the 45 to 54 year old women, a larger decline of 1.3 children per woman between the 45 to 54 year olds and the 35 to 44 year olds can be seen. Older women, those aged 60 to 64 and 65 and over, had still larger numbers of children ever born: an average of 5.4 and 5.8 per woman, respectively.

Tables 5.2 and 5.3 show the differences between the civilian and military female populations in numbers of children ever born, numbers still alive, and births in the previous year. Civilian women had more children ever born per 1,000 women in all age groups except the 15 to 19 and 60 to 64 year olds, and also had more children still alive per 1,000 women. For births in the previous year, however, military women had higher rates in the 2 youngest age groups than did civilian women.

Table 5.2. Children Ever Born, Still Alive, and Children Born in the

Last Year: 1980 Civilians

Numbers Per 1000 Women

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

CIVILIAN Children Children Births Children Children Births

Ever Still Previous Ever Still Previous

Age Group Females Born Alive Year Born Alive Year

Total..... 26,562 72,734 68,947 ... 2,738 2,596 ...

15 to 19 yrs. 4,565 502 491 200 110 108 44

20 to 24 yrs. 3,485 2,951 2,913 595 847 836 171

25 to 29 yrs. 3,583 6,160 6,055 657 1,719 1,690 183

30 to 34 yrs. 3,256 8,626 8,451 394 2,649 2,596 121

35 to 44 yrs. 4,472 16,866 16,386 245 3,771 3,664 55

45 to 54 yrs. 3,573 17,691 16,954 ... 4,951 4,745 ...

55 to 59 yrs. 1,231 6,408 6,027 ... 5,206 4,896 ...

60 to 64 yrs. 889 4,735 4,345 ... 5,326 4,888 ...

65 + yrs..... 1,508 8,795 7,325 ... 5,832 4,857 ...

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Unpublished tabulations, U.S. Bureau of the Census.

Table 5.3. Children Ever Born, Still Alive, and Children Born in the

Last Year: 1980 Military

Numbers Per 1000 Women

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

MILITARY Children Children Births Children Children Births

Ever Still Previous Ever Still Previous

Age Group Females Born Alive Year Born Alive Year

Total..... 6,037 9,306 8,988 ... 1,541 1,489 ...

15 to 19 yrs. 579 111 109 47 192 188 81

20 to 24 yrs. 1,604 1,193 1,166 290 744 727 181

25 to 29 yrs. 1,547 2,234 2,169 240 1,444 1,402 155

30 to 34 yrs. 1,179 2,239 2,194 111 1,899 1,861 94

35 to 44 yrs. 787 2,009 1,939 30 2,553 2,464 38

45 to 54 yrs. 190 746 703 ... 3,926 3,700 ...

55 to 59 yrs. 49 236 224 ... 4,816 4,571 ...

60 to 64 yrs. 30 190 179 ... 6,333 5,967 ...

65 + yrs..... 72 348 305 ... 4,833 4,236 ...

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 19 and Unpublished Data

The fertility of women born on Guam was higher than for women born elsewhere (Table 5.4). Although all women had 1,712 children ever born per 1,000 women in 1980, those born on Guam had 2,037 children per 1,000 women compared to 1,476 for women born outside Guam. The data for children still alive and children born in the year preceding the census followed the same trend.

Table 5.4. Children Ever Born, Still Alive and Births in the Last Year by

Birthplace of Mother: 1980

Numbers Per 1000 Women

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Born Not Born Not

on Born on Born

Fertility Total Guam Guam Total Guam Guam

Females, 15 to 44......... 25057 10523 14534 ... ... ...

Children ever born............. 42891 21435 21456 1712 2037 1476

Children still alive........... 41873 20842 21031 1671 1981 1447

Birth in year preceding census. 2809 1224 1585 112 116 109

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 24.

Women who were not in the labor force in 1980 had higher fertility than women who were in the labor force (Table 5.5). Of course, some of the women who were not in the labor force may not have been in the labor force because they were caring for young children. For females 16 years and over, there were 1,791 children ever born per 1,000 women. Women in the labor force had 1,671 children ever born per 1,000 women, compared to 1,930 per 1,000 women not in the labor force, and 1,628 per 1,000 women who were unemployed. Of those women employed in the civilian labor force, those who had worked 35 or more weeks in 1979 had rates of children ever born and still alive per 1,000 women that were 25 percent higher than those who had only worked 1 to 34 weeks, and a rate of children born in the last year that was 34 percent higher than those working fewer weeks. Women in the Armed Forces had the lowest number of children ever born: 468 per 1,000 women.

Table 5.5. Children Ever Born, Still Alive and Births in the Last Year by

Labor Force Participation: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Numbers Per 1000 Women

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Chldrn Chldrn Born Chldrn Chldrn Born

Fe‑ Ever Still Last Ever Still Last

Labor Force Participation males Born Alive Year Born Alive Year

Females 16‑44 years. 23938 42874 41856 2800 1791 1749 117

In Labor Force........... 12828 21433 20999 1147 1671 1637 89

Armed Forces........... 883 413 401 67 468 454 76

Civilian Labor Force... 11945 21020 20598 1080 1760 1724 90

Employed............. 11130 19693 19317 963 1769 1736 87

Worked 35+ weeks... 8471 15550 15249 737 1836 1800 87

Worked 1‑34 weeks.. 2276 3350 3288 149 1472 1445 65

Unemployed........... 815 1327 1281 117 1628 1572 144

Not in Labor Force....... 11110 21441 20857 1653 1930 1877 149

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 36

Table 5.6 shows ratios of children ever born to children still alive per female by age. The oldest age group of 65 and over produced the highest numbers of children ever born per woman; those age groups who can be assumed to have completed their fertility had an average of over 5 children per woman. They had the lowest percentages of children still alive, but this should not be considered unusual. Some of the deaths to these children would have happened at early ages, causing mothers to have additional children to replace those who had died, but the majority would have occurred to them as adults, and not occasioned replacement childbearing. The highest ratio of children still alive per female was in the 20 to 24 age group, at 98.4 percent. Since the total number of children ever born per woman has apparently been decreasing for those women who have completed their fertility, from 5.8 per woman for those 65 and older to 4.6 for those 45 to 49, it may be assumed that women in the younger age groups will follow the same trend and will have fewer children ever born at the end of their childbearing years.

Table 5.6 Children Ever Born and Surviving By Age: 1980

Children Children Percent

Children Children Ever Born Still Child.

Ever Still Per Alive Per Still

Age Group Females Born Alive Female Female Alive

15 to 19 yrs. 5,144 613 600 .1 .1 97.9

20 to 24 yrs. 5,089 4,144 4,079 .8 .8 98.4

25 to 29 yrs. 5,130 8,394 8,224 1.6 1.6 98.0

30 to 34 yrs. 4,435 10,865 10,645 2.4 2.4 98.0

35 to 39 yrs. 2,860 9,192 8,959 3.2 3.1 97.5

40 to 44 yrs. 2,399 9,687 9,370 4.0 3.9 96.7

45 to 49 yrs. 2,018 9,259 8,901 4.6 4.4 96.1

50 to 54 yrs. 1,745 9,178 8,756 5.3 5.0 95.4

55 to 59 yrs. 1,280 6,644 6,251 5.2 4.9 94.1

60 to 64 yrs. 919 4,925 4,524 5.4 4.9 91.9

65 yrs & over 1,580 9,143 7,630 5.8 4.8 83.5

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑B54, Table 15, PC80‑1‑C/D54,

Table 19, and STF3, Table 31

OWN CHILDREN FERTILITY ESTIMATION

Because census data for Guam are collected by household, and the own children method of fertility has been readily available in the Pacific, this method has been used to investigate changing fertility trends on Guam. Other demographic techniques are included where appropriate.

The own children method has been described in earlier publications and needs only to be recapitulated briefly here. (For more detailed accounts, see, for example, Cho 1973, Retherford and Cho 1978, and Cho, Retherford, and Choe 1987; the current version of the own children computer programs uses formulas given in these sources.) The method is a census‑ or survey‑based reverse survival technique for estimating age‑specific birth rates for years previous to a census or household survey. Matching of children and mothers was based on a special question on mother's line number or person number on the household schedule, if the mother was present.

The matched (i.e. own) children, classified by child's age and mother's age, are reverse‑survived to estimate numbers of births by age of mother in previous years. Reverse survival is also used to estimate numbers of women in previous years. Since there are no post‑enumeration surveys in the American Pacific and no independent estimates of the population exist, no adjustments are made for underenumeration. After adjustments are made for unmatched (non‑own) children, age‑specific birth rates are calculated by dividing the number of births by the number of women. Estimates are computed for each previous year or group of years back to 15 years before the census. Estimates are not computed further back than 15 years because births must then be based on children at ages 15 or older at enumeration, a large proportion of whom do not reside in the same household as their mother and hence cannot be matched. All calculations are done initially by single years of age and time (years before the census). Estimates for groups of ages or groups of calendar years are obtained by appropriately aggregating numerators and denominators of single‑year rates and then dividing the aggregated numerator by the aggregated denominator. For reasons of economy, the method is usually applied to survey samples rather than complete counts, but because the population of Guam is so small, the complete counts were used.

Non‑own (unmatched) children are allocated to mothers by multiplying each age‑specific category of own (matched) children, specified by mother's age, by the corresponding age‑specific ratio of all children to own children. Thus, the number of own children at a given age is adjusted upward by the same factor regardless of mother's age, thereby introducing some error in the fertility estimates since the proportionate distribution of non‑own children by age of mother generally differs somewhat from the proportionate distribution of own children by age of mother. It is, of course, impossible to specify non‑own adjustment factors by mother's age since the mother of an unmatched child is by definition not in the household. Since older women are usually in more stable household situations than younger women, the nature of the error from not specifying non‑own adjustment factors by mother's age is usually to reallocate erroneously a certain proportion of non‑own children of a given age from younger mothers to older mothers. This error, if present here, should have little effect on the total fertility rate, but it produces an age pattern of fertility that is too low at the younger ages and too high at the older ages. The error is minor if the adjustment factors for non‑own children are low, but sometimes these factors can be quite high. For Guam, in 1980, the factors are indeed low, as can be seen in Table 5.7.

Table 5.7. Percentage Of All Children Who Are Non‑own, By Age:1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age of Child

Census ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1980..... 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 6 5 5 6 7 7 8 8

___________________________________________________________________

Source: Levin and Retherford, 1986.

Reverse‑survival requires life tables. For the 1980 census, the life table was obtained through the use of census questions on number of children ever born and number of children still alive. By means of a method developed by Brass (1975), this child survivorship information was used to obtain estimates of child mortality that were in turn matched to the appropriate level of the Coale‑Demeny Model West life table family (Coale and Demeny 1966). (The procedure for obtaining the usual Brass estimates and matching them to Coale‑Demeny model life tables is built into the own‑children computing package and was used here; see Midkiff and Choe 1978.) The level obtained in this way specified life tables that were then used to derive reverse‑survival ratios. For Guam, Coale‑Demeny West Table 23.1 was obtained, which indicated a life expectancy at birth for females of 75.3, the highest in the Pacific Islands (Levin and Retherford 1986:10). Constant mortality was assumed for the entire 15 year period. Although sometimes mortality estimates are too low (and life expectancy too high) because of a tendency for respondents to selectively omit mention of dead children when responding to the child survivorship questions, here the reverse‑survival factors are already close to one and are quite insensitive to errors of even several years of life expectancy. Also, it is quite unlikely that women have neglected to mention children who have died.

Own‑children estimates of age‑specific marital birth rates were obtained in the following way: First, age‑specific proportions currently married in five‑year age groups were obtained from the 1960, 1970, and 1980 censuses of Guam and linearly interpolated between censuses to get age‑specific proportions currently married in five‑year age groups in each intercensal year. In this way an array of age‑specific proportions currently married, with age in five‑year age groups along one dimension, and time in calendar years (or midpoints of time periods) along the other dimension was obtained. The original own‑children analysis provided a corresponding array of age‑specific birth rates for all women. From these two matrices a third array of age‑specific marital birth rates was arrived at by dividing, term by term, the array of age‑specific birth rates by the array of age‑specific proportions currently married. This calculation assumes that all births occur within marriage.

Marital total fertility rates (but not total fertility rates for all women) pertain only to ages 20 to 49. The MTFR including ages 15 to 19 is not a good measure because it weights the birth rates at age 15 to 19, which is based on relatively few married women on Guam because of moderately late marriage, to the same extent that it weights birth rates at older ages.

Age‑specific proportions never married were obtained in the same way as age‑specific proportions currently married. First, age‑specific proportions never married in five‑year age groups were taken from the 1960, 1970 and 1980 censuses of Guam, and then linearly interpolated between censuses to get age‑specific proportions never married in five‑year age groups at midpoints of intercensal time periods or subperiods. Each set of age‑specific proportions never married so derived provided the basis for calculating a value of the singulate mean age at marriage (SMAM), which is used as a summary measure of nuptiality.

The Coale‑Trussell m index of marital fertility control was computed (Coale and Trussell 1974, 1975, 1978; a computer program developed by James Trussell at Princeton University's Office of Population Research was used for this purpose). This index measures the deviation from the typical age pattern of natural fertility, defined as fertility in the absence of deliberate family limitation, that results from deliberate family limitation. The m index depends on the shape of the age‑specific marital fertility schedule, not on the level of marital fertility. In the natural fertility situation, the shape of the schedule is convex throughout the reproductive ages, whereas in the family limitation situation it is concave at the older reproductive ages. For purposes of constructing the m index, the standard age schedule of natural fertility is obtained as the arithmetic average of 10 of the age‑specific natural marital fertility schedules designated by Henry (1961). If the observed age‑specific fertility schedule has the same shape as that of the standard age‑specific natural fertility schedule, m = 0. If the observed schedule deviates from the standard schedule by an amount that is the average deviation on 43 reasonably reliable marital fertility schedules in the early 1960s, representing a range of differences in the extent of fertility control, then m = 1. Values of m higher than 1 are also possible.

It should be noted that the own‑children fertility estimates are biased by migration, a considerable problem for fertility estimates for Guam. If, before moving, out‑migrants have about the same age‑specific birth rates as nonmigrants, and if out‑migrants take their children with them, then the own‑children estimates of age‑specific fertility for earlier years, based on nonmigrants present at the time of the census, should be about the same as if the migrants had actually been present. If women who migrate leave their children behind in the temporary care of relatives, however, the own‑children fertility estimates will be biased upward, even if out‑migrants and nonmigrants have identical age‑specific fertility. In this case, the children of migrants are treated as non‑own and allocated to reverse‑survived nonmigrant women. It is not clear how much of this type of child‑leaving was occurring in Guam in 1980.

Results. The total fertility rate for Guam decreased from 4.2 to 3.0 during the 15 year period before the 1980 census (Table 5.8 and Figure 5.1). These rates were the lowest in the Pacific for areas which applied the own‑children method (Levin and Retherford 1986). The marital fertility rates showed a similar decrease, from 5.0 to 3.7 during the period, indicating low marital fertility rates, and that most of the fertility was taking place within marriage. Part of the decline can be attributed to a slight increase in the singulate mean age at marriage (SMAM) from 21.1 years to 21.9 years during the period, but a large part of the decline was due to acceptance of family planning, especially prior to 1980. The m index increased from .30 from 1966 to 1970, to .63 between 1971 and 1975, to .92 between 1976 and 1980 (Figure 5.2). Almost all of the decline during the final period is attributable to conscious child limitation (i.e. the closer to 1 that m is, the greater the amount of deliberate child limitation.). By 1979, family planning services were provided not only by the government and voluntary organizations, but also by the military.

Figure 5.3 shows the age‑specific fertility rates for the 1966 to 1970 period and the 1976 to 1980 period. The figure shows that although there has not been noticeable fertility decline for the youngest women, there was noticeable decrease with age for women in the 25 to 29 year age groups and older.

Table 5.8. Total Fertility Rates and Age‑Specific Rates, and Marital

Total Fertility and Age‑Specific Rates, Derived by

the Own‑Children Method: 1980

Total Fertility Rates Marital Fertility Rates

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1976‑ 1971‑ 1966‑ 1976‑ 1971‑ 1966‑

Age Group 1980 1975 1970 1980 1975 1970

TFR....... 4.24 3.55 3.02 5.02 4.24 3.71

15 to 19 yrs. 57 69 66 494 638 661

20 to 24 yrs. 190 181 171 301 299 296

25 to 29 yrs. 222 188 164 266 231 206

30 to 34 yrs. 177 137 110 203 159 130

35 to 39 yrs. 128 86 64 146 99 75

40 to 44 yrs. 61 39 24 74 47 29

45 to 49 yrs. 11 10 6 14 13 7

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: Levin and Retherford, 1986, Appendix Tables 1 and 2.

Figure 5.1 Total and Marital Total Fertility Rates:1966 to 1980

The decrease is consistent with increased participation in the labor force, and a general decline in fertility for the Territory as a whole. Data for age‑specific marital fertility rates are consistent with this finding.

Vital statistics for Guam from 1980 allow for comparisons with the own‑children estimates (Table 5.9). The total fertility rate derived from vital registration, using the 1980 census for denominators, was 3.24, compared to 3.16 for the own‑children estimated fertility. The age‑specific rates also were very close, although the own‑children estimates were very slightly lower. The difference may be attributed to the mortality estimates which could have been influenced by non‑reporting of some deaths to children. Ratios greater than 1 can be seen in 2 age groups, 35 to 39 and 45 to 49. In the 35 to 39 year old group, this ratio was most probably caused by age slippage: incorrect reporting of age of women in the two age groups bracketing this one caused children to be "packed" into the 35 to 39 year old group, while the very high ratio at ages 45 to 49 years was caused by the overallocation of non‑own children to women at these ages.

Figure 5.2 m‑Index of Marital Fertility Control: 1966 to 1980

Figure 5.3 Age‑Specific Fertility Rates: 1969‑73 and 1974‑78

Table 5.9 Ratios of Fertility Estimates Derived by the Own‑Children (OC)

Method to Fertility Estimates based on Alternative Source(AS)

OC/AS ratios

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year ASFRs

of ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Esti‑ TFR TFR 15‑ 20‑ 25‑ 30‑ 35‑ 40‑ 45‑

mate (OC) (AS) TFR 19 24 29 34 39 44 49

1980 3.16 3.24 .98 .91 .96 .98 .92 1.11 .96 4.00

___________________________________________________________________________

Note: Births are from Guam, Department of Public Health and Social Services

(1980); numbers of women from the census.

Source: Levin and Retherford, 1986, Table 5

We have presented some preliminary data on fertility estimates using the own‑children method of fertility estimation. After the 1990 census it will be possible to look at the overlap between the two censuses to attempt to measure the ability of the census to obtain indirectly estimated measures of fertility.

VITAL STATISTICS

In addition to measures derived from census data, fertility indicators are also computed from vital statistics records. On Guam, unlike many developing countries, vital registration coverage is complete. The measures described in the following section are from the years 1980 through 1985, and are based on populations estimated from the 1980 census base population. While births and deaths are recorded yearly, Guam has no accurate record of migration; the denominators used may be lower than the actual populations.

Table 5.10 shows the number and percent of births by age of mother from 1980 to 1985. As can be expected, females aged 20 to 24 had the highest number and proportion of births in every year, followed by those 25 to 29 years old. The total number of births grew between 1980 and 1981, dropped in 1982, then repeated the increase‑decrease cycle between 1983 and 1985. The numbers and percentages of increase/decrease are not large enough to be significant, even for a small population such as Guam's.

Table 5.10. Live Births by Age of Mother: 1980 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total........... 3197 3067 3184 2992 3008 3003

Percent....... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

15 to 19.......... 13.6 15.2 13.4 13.8 14.3 12.8

20 to 24.......... 34.4 33.2 34.0 34.7 33.4 32.9

25 to 29.......... 27.5 27.0 27.7 27.0 28.6 29.8

30 to 34.......... 16.3 16.8 17.0 17.5 17.1 17.2

35 to 39.......... 6.8 6.8 6.7 5.7 5.2 5.1

40 to 44.......... 1.3 .8 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.0

45 to 49.......... .0 .1 .1 .1 .1 .2

Unknown........... .1 .3 0.0 .1 .0 0.0

_______________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam

Births by race of child are shown in Table 5.11. The number of births by race each year does not vary greatly, though the proportion of mixed Chamorro births seems to be growing a little each year. Because of the unreliability of ethnicity statistics from the 1980 Census, it was not advisable to attempt to compute birth rates by race of child.

Table 5.11. Live Births by Race of Child: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total.......... 3197 3067 3184 2992 3008 3003

Percent....... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Chamorro.......... 50.1 49.9 49.6 48.6 47.3 44.3

Chamorro Only... 21.6 23.3 22.3 21.6 21.8 22.9

Chamorro‑Other.. 10.5 9.9 10.6 9.8 10.2 10.8

Chamorro‑Unknown 18.0 16.6 16.6 17.1 15.3 13.4

Filipino.......... 14.6 14.0 13.3 15.6 15.4 16.3

Caucasian......... 13.4 14.3 15.5 14.8 16.3 15.4

Micronesian....... 1.8 2.2 1.9 2.2 1.6 2.4

Asian............. 1.0 0.9 1.2 1.1 1.4 1.5

Negro............. 2.4 1.7 2.2 2.0 1.7 1.6

All Other......... 16.7 16.9 16.3 15.6 16.2 15.7

Not Reported...... 0.0 0.2 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.0

________________________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

Table 5.12 summarizes fertility indicators for the births from 1980 to 1985. The first fertility indicator is the Crude Birth Rate (CBR); defined as the total number of births per year per 1,000 midyear population in an area. The CBR for Guam ranged from 26.3 births per 1,000 population in 1984 to 28.3 in 1980.

Table 5.12. Fertility Rates Derived From Vital Statistics Data

Guam: 1980 to 1985

Rate 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Crude Birth Rate 26.8 26.3 27.9 26.8 27.6 28.3

General Fertility Rate 113.3 111.4 118.4 113.8 116.9 119.2

Total Fertility Rate 3.2 3.0 3.2 3.1 3.1 3.2

Marital Total Fert. Rate 3.8 3.6 3.9 3.2 3.7 3.8

Gen. Marital Fert. Rate 178.8 176.5 188.4 181.9 187.7 193.1

Gen.Legitimate Fert. Rate 124.5 126.8 140.2 137.7 146.3 153.2

Illegitimacy Ratio 260.6 281.7 255.6 206.6 177.2 165.8

Illegitimacy Rate 96.1 100.9 96.3 74.0 64.6 61.1

Gross Reproduction Rate 1550.7 1529.9 1472.3 1497.4 1518.6 1525.4

Net Reproduction Rate 1486.3 1479.7 1580.4 1434.7 1490.5 1509.0

Mean Age of Mother 26.5 26.4 26.7 26.6 25.6 26.5

Mean Length of Generation 26.4 26.4 26.8 26.2 26.6 27.2

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Report, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

The major drawback of the CBR is that it does not take into account the age structure of the population for which it is computed, nor does it confine itself to the population "at risk" of giving birth. One measure that does take age and gender into account is the General Fertility Rate (GFR), which is computed using only the female population 15 to 44 (or 49) as its denominator, while leaving total number of births as the numerator. These values ranged from 111.4 in 1984 to 119.2 in 1980. The GFR ranges from the low 60s to the high 200s in developing countries (Palmore and Gardner, 1983:69); Guam falls into the middle range.

The GFR limits the population more than the CBR does, but can still be affected by the age structure of the female population. The Total Fertility Rate (TFR), a summary measure that uses age‑specific birth rates, attempts to eliminate age‑structure differences. The TFR estimates the total number of live births 1,000 women would have if they lived through their reproductive years and were subject to a given set of age‑specific birth rates. The TFRs shown in Table 5.11 is the average number of live births Guam women would have if they followed Guam's age‑specific birth rate schedule, 3.2 in 1983 and 3.1 in 1984. TFRs in the Pacific region computed from census data range from 8.7 for Western Samoa in 1966 to 2.8 for Tuvalu in 1979 (Levin and Retherford, 1986:18).

As most births take place within marriages, rates are available to measure fertility while limiting the population at risk to married women. These are the General Marital Fertility Rate (GMFR), the Marital Total Fertility Rate (MTFR) and the General Legitimate Fertility Rate (GLFR). If compared to the General Fertility Rate and Total Fertility Rate, the "married" rates are higher, but not excessively so, indicating that, on Guam, most of the births do occur within marriages. There are some, however, that do not, as shown by the Illegitimacy Ratio and Illegitimacy Rate. The ratio expresses the proportion of illegitimate births per 1,000 live births; this ranged from a low of 166 in 1980 to a high of 282 in 1984. Other countries have had rates as low as 12 for Greece in 1961 and as high as 640 for El Salvador in 1961 (Shryock and Siegel, 1976:283). The illegitimacy rate represents illegitimacy in relation to the population at risk of having illegitimate births, and is the number of illegitimate births per year per 1,000 unmarried women. Rates ranged from 61 in 1980 to 101 in 1984.

Reproduction rates tell us whether a population will grow, just replace itself, or decline. The Gross Reproduction Rate (GRR) is the number of female live births 1,000 women are expected to have over their reproductive lifetime, if none of them were subjected to dying. GRRs of 1,000 would mean exact replacement of these women; values higher or lower would mean growth or decline, respectively. The Net Reproduction Rate is similar, but it takes the mortality risk of women in their reproductive years into account. Both rates for females on Guam for all the years covered are at or above 1400, showing that the population is expected to continue growing. The mean length of a generation, computed from data collected for the NRR, tells how many years after birth a woman replaces herself with a female birth. On Guam, this ranged from 26.2 years to 27.2 years.

The mean age of mother is computed to distinguish populations who have their children relatively early in life from those who have them relatively later. It can also show whether women are delaying childbearing. On Guam, it would appear that women are delaying childbearing slightly, but these rates may be affected by the small number of women involved. In 1980, the mean age was 26.5 years; after dipping to 25.6 in 1981, it rose to 26.7 in 1983, then dipped and rose again.

SUMMARY

Fertility on Guam is declining. The number of children ever born for women who have completed their childbearing decreased from 5.8 to 3.6 children per woman in 1980. Except for those age 15 to 19 and 60 to 64 years, civilian women had more children ever born and still alive than did military women. The fertility for women born on Guam was higher than for women born elsewhere; women not in the labor force had higher fertility than those who were in the labor force.

Census methods of measuring fertility showed that fertility on Guam declined between 1965 and 1980, both overall and for married women. Most fertility took place within marriage. There was a slight increase in mean age at marriage, contributing to the decline in fertility. Another contributing factor was the use of family planning. Many women probably delayed childbearing due to labor force participation.

Vital statistics indicators for the past 6 years showed that the fertility decline was continuing, though reproduction rates were still high enough to keep the population growing. While some illegitimacy occurred, most births continued to take place within marriage. The proportion of mixed Chamorro births increased every year; the proportions of births of children of all other races fluctuated from year to year.

We have seen in this chapter two methods of measuring fertility, using census and vital registration data. Both have confirmed that Guam's population will continue to grow through reproductive measures, regardless of other factors, such as migration.

CHAPTER 6

MORTALITY

Mortality describes the risk of dying. Measures of mortality quantify the risks of dying for a population exposed over a period of time. Mortality on Guam has been, for the most part, decreasing since the inception of the U.S. Naval Administration. After Spain ceded Guam to the United States, considerable changes to the islands infrastructure took place. The enhanced quality of life dramatically affected the demographic picture of Guam's population.

More than any other single factor, a healthier environment probably had the most effect on the downward trend of mortality. Despite the recent phenomenal growth in the population from immigration, the quality of life is still conducive to longevity and natural increase. Post‑war Guam saw dramatic changes in social and economic structures. Chamorros experienced dramatic transitions that were also occurring on the U.S. mainland.

The 1980 census data did not include questions designed to obtain information on mortality of Guam's population.

MORTALITY CHARACTERISTICS

The system of vital registration, with respect to the recording of deaths, was started by the Spanish government prior to the turn of the century, and was adequate enough to be continued by the then newly‑established U.S. Naval Government. With the conversion from the Spanish language to English on the forms, this system continued until mid‑1955, after which a standard U.S. registration form was instituted that allowed pre‑coded automated tabulation. At any rate, mortality trends for the early part of this century are largely derived from the reporting of deaths by village commissioners to the ministry of civilian affairs, which was responsible for vital registration.

The mortality trend at the beginning of the century can best be described as extreme at certain points, when compared to later periods. Significant events such as the catastrophic typhoon in 1905, and a series of epidemics in 1918 (influenza), 1924 (bacillary dysentery), 1932 and 1934 (measles), and 1938 (whooping cough) contributed to high mortality (Haddock 1973:38). These epidemics resulted in just over 1,000 deaths over a 30 year period.

Despite these events, Guam's Crude Death Rate (CDR) showed a gradual decline beginning in 1910 when sanitary conditions, such as the introduction of piped water to the city of Agana, were improved by the Naval government. In fact, the epidemics had the net effect on the CDR (as it pertained to Guam's aggregate population) of a decline from about 25 to approximately 20 deaths per 1000 persons (Jongstra 1985:82).

Registration of all vital events stopped during World War II, but resumed immediately afterward. Thus, information on vital events that occurred during the war was obtained from survivors, as they best could recall. However, there existed a serious under‑registration of deaths for those two and a half years, including deaths that occurred during the liberation of Guam. There were about 1,100 deaths during the two months of liberation (July and August 1944). Subsequent death records show an accumulated total of 1,342 deaths for 1944. The

total deaths for the two months, therefore, accounted for 82 percent of the total deaths (Jongstra 1985:83‑84). The number of civilian casualties as opposed to Japanese and U.S. military deaths is undetermined.

The immigrant population has affected the mortality rates during the century because the age and sex distribution of immigrants differs significantly from the native population (see Chapter 7 on Migration). That is, because immigrants tend to be young adult males, the denominators tend to increase while the numerators do not since mortality is rather low for the age groups of migrants; also, there is probably some selection in the migration process ‑ immigrants may be healthier than the sending population in general.

The Crude Death Rate decreased considerably in the 1950s to about 5 per 1000, where it remains. The mortality decline that had set in before World War II did not show any further dramatic decrease after the 1950s.

Infant mortality at the outset of this century was relatively high. The Infant Mortality Rate (IMR) was also affected by the diseases that claimed lives at all other ages until 1950, when modern medical facilities were built. A steady decline in the IMR is consistent with an overall reduction of mortality during this period, from about 200 deaths per 1000 live births in 1902 to about 30 per 1000 in 1950. Near the end of 1950, Guam's administration became civilian, resulting in some under‑registration for 1951, and showing a sharp dip in rates (Figure 6.1). Except for this one aberration, Infant Mortality Rates continued to decrease gradually, although more slowly than before, until they reached the current value of about 10 infant deaths per 1000 live births.

The age and sex distribution of mortality clearly shows fundamental changes in the pattern of mortality that occurred between 1920 and 1980 (Jongstra 1985: 85). The values for 1920 in Tables 6.1 and 6.2 particularly suffer from an upward bias, due to the inclusion of deaths resulting from the influenza epidemic that swept Guam in November and December 1918. Jongstra further notes that the bias is not as strong as might be expected, since it was partly compensated for by the low mortality that characterizes the vital statistics of 1919 and 1920. Relatively low mortality can still be noted from the age specific mortality rates in 1930 for the higher age groups. Around 1940, a similar, although less dramatic, situation existed as the result of an epidemic of whooping cough in 1938. For 1970, some deviations from the general mortality decline appeared which can be attributed to deaths among persons returning from Vietnam (Jongstra 1985: 85).

Table 6.1 Age‑Specific Mortality Rates For Males: Guam: 1920 to 1980

(Rates per 1000)

Males Year

Age Group 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980

Under 1.. 138.9 191.8 109.8 60.9 31.0 31.1 13.6

1 to 4... 59.5 47.8 12.5 4.5 1.4 1.6 .7

5 to 9... 13.1 5.1 2.1 1.2 .6 .4 .4

10 to 14. 4.4 1.5 1.1 .5 .6 .9 .3

15 to 19. 11.8 3.5 1.8 .8 1.8 3.9 1.3

20 to 24. 12.0 5.0 6.0 1.2 2.3 2.7 2.2

25 to 29. 4.1 4.5 1.5 1.3 2.3 2.1

30 to 34. 12.9 5.2 7.1 1.9 2.1 2.5 2.3

35 to 39. 11.3 3.5 1.4 2.9 1.8

40 to 44. 30.4 10.5 17.9 4.3 4.0 5.7 3.9

45 to 49. 18.2 9.7 7.3 5.9 7.4

50 to 54. 52.1 17.2 26.7 10.9 12.2 11.5 10.9

55 to 59. 18.8 11.8 19.7 20.7 14.1

60 to 64. 112.4 28.6 33.5 28.8 29.1 38.1 26.8

65 to 69. 351.4 56.0 38.2 43.4 40.1 35.7

70 to 74. 59.3 72.3 55.6 48.4 89.6 42.5

Over 75.. 147.1 173.7 98.6 142.2 83.3 86.5

________________________________________________________________________

Note: For 1920 and 1930, some data collected for 10‑year age groups only.

Source: Eduard Jongstra, Unpublished Master's Thesis, State

University of Groningen, The Netherlands, 1985; Office of Vital

Statistics, Department of Public Health and Social Services,

Guam

FIGURE 6.1 INFANT DEATHS PER 1000 BIRTHS

GUAM: 1920 TO 1980

The age group 1 to 4 years old experienced the biggest decrease in mortality rates. Between 1920 and 1980, mortality rates of children 1 to 4 decreased by 99 percent. All other groups, but particularly those less than 20 for males and less than 45 for females, also showed dramatic decreases in mortality. For females, this improvement in life expectancy was demonstrated in the childbearing ages. Table 6.2 shows that until 1960, female mortality between ages 15 and 40 was higher than for males in that age range. Between 1950 and 1986, this situation appears to have reversed. Better health care around the time of child delivery undoubtedly contributed to this change.

Table 6.2 Age‑Specific Mortality Rates For Females, Guam: 1920 to 1980

(Rates per 1000)

Females Year

Age Group 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980

Under 1.. 149.3 171.0 104.8 48.9 26.6 17.3 15.1

1 to 4... 55.8 47.5 14.1 3.3 1.2 1.4 .5

5 to 9... 12.0 5.5 1.5 .8 .7 .4 .3

10 to 14. 4.0 2.5 1.2 1.4 .6 .5 .1

15 to 19. 11.5 4.9 2.9 2.7 .3 .7 .7

20 to 24. 13.3 10.2 6.8 3.0 .8 .9 .7

25 to 29. 12.0 5.7 1.6 1.2 .7 1.0

30 to 34. 21.6 6.7 9.9 3.9 .5 .6 .5

35 to 39. 10.3 4.8 2.0 1.4 1.6

40 to 44. 20.8 10.3 9.8 5.9 3.8 2.1 1.5

45 to 49. 8.1 10.0 5.3 6.0 1.8

50 to 54. 44.3 18.3 8.9 11.0 9.0 5.5 5.7

55 to 59. 16.0 12.2 7.6 13.2 8.8

60 to 64. 102.5 22.4 24.0 22.2 17.3 17.6 13.4

65 to 69. 267.7 25.2 28.2 23.5 26.5 26.1

70 to 74. 49.3 65.6 44.4 58.4 52.4 38.4

Over 75.. 68.6 152.1 77.8 86.4 94.9 80.9

________________________________________________________________________

Note: Some data for 1920 and 1930 collected for 10‑year age groups only.

Source: Eduard Jongstra, Unpublished Master's Thesis, State

University of Groningen, The Netherlands, 1985; Office of Vital

Statistics, Department of Public Health and Social Services,

Guam.

VITAL STATISTICS DATA

For the period 1978 to 1982 (Table 6.3), more deaths were reported in the age group 45 to 64 than in any other age group. About 30 percent of all deaths in every year occurred in this age group. This age group also showed just over twice the number of deaths that occurred in the next youngest age group of 25 to 44 years.

Table 6.3 Distribution of Deaths by Age: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age at Death 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total deaths... 424 377 422 406 443

Less than 1 year.. 46 33 49 32 34

1 to 4 years...... 11 9 5 3 10

5 to 14 years..... 10 4 11 4 6

15 to 24 years.... 39 31 25 26 14

25 to 44 years.... 65 50 58 51 45

45 to 64 years.... 125 120 126 125 141

65 to 74 years.... 60 63 82 91 93

75 to 84 years.... 51 52 42 46 75

Over 85 years..... 17 15 24 28 25

_______________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Report, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

Between 1978 and 1981, the death rates for infants (those less than 1 year of age) experienced peaks and troughs before stabilizing in 1982. However, the percent distribution for the five years was fairly level, with the highest percentage reported at 11.6 in 1980, and the lowest at 7.7 percent in 1982 (Table 6.4).

Table 6.4 Percent Deaths by Age: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age at Death 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total deaths... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 1 year.. 10.8 8.8 11.6 7.8 7.7

1 to 4 years...... 2.6 2.4 1.2 .7 2.3

5 to 14 years..... 2.4 1.1 2.6 1.0 1.4

15 to 24 years.... 9.2 8.2 5.9 6.4 3.2

25 to 44 years.... 15.3 13.3 13.7 12.6 10.2

45 to 64 years.... 29.5 31.8 29.9 30.8 31.8

65 to 74 years.... 14.2 16.7 19.4 22.4 21.0

75 to 84 years.... 12.0 13.8 10.0 11.3 16.9

Over 85 years..... 4.0 4.0 5.7 6.9 5.6

_______________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Report, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

Moreover, the distribution of infant deaths between sexes (Table 6.5) shows an alternating pattern over the five years, beginning with 1978, where males showed a total of 27 deaths, and females 19. For the following year, 1979, the reverse is evident, with males showing a total of 11 deaths and females 22. The situation again reversed itself in 1980, with males having 30 deaths and females with 19. This switching back and forth continued for the next 2 years, with neither males nor females having a dominant trend in numbers of infant deaths.

Table 6.5 Deaths by Age and Sex: 1978 to 1982

1978 1979 1980 1981 1982

Age at ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Death Male Fmle Male Fmle Male Fmle Male Fmle Male Fmle

Total... 274 150 233 144 263 159 242 164 251 192

Under 1 yr 27 19 11 22 30 19 13 19 19 15

1 to 4.... 3 8 7 2 2 3 1 2 6 4

5 to 14... 7 3 2 2 9 2 2 2 2 4

15 to 24.. 33 6 19 12 20 5 22 4 11 3

25 to 44.. 46 19 34 16 44 14 34 17 33 12

45 to 64.. 86 39 89 31 86 40 86 39 91 50

65 to 74.. 31 29 36 27 46 36 53 38 50 43

75 to 84.. 32 19 27 25 18 24 23 23 33 42

Over 85... 9 8 8 7 8 16 8 20 6 19

Total 64.6 35.4 61.8 38.2 62.3 37.7 59.6 40.4 56.7 43.3

Under 1 yr 6.4 4.5 2.9 5.8 7.1 4.5 3.2 4.7 4.3 3.4

1 to 4.... .7 1.9 1.9 .5 .5 .7 .3 .5 1.4 .9

5 to 14... 1.7 .7 .5 .5 2.1 .5 .5 .5 .5 .9

15 to 24.. 7.9 1.4 5.0 3.2 4.7 1.2 5.4 1.0 2.5 .7

25 to 44.. 10.8 4.5 9.0 4.2 10.4 3.3 8.4 4.2 7.4 2.7

45 to 64.. 20.1 9.2 23.6 8.2 20.4 9.5 21.2 9.6 20.5 11.3

65 to 74.. 7.3 6.8 9.5 7.2 10.9 8.5 13.1 9.4 11.3 9.7

75 to 84.. 12.0 4.5 7.2 6.6 4.3 5.7 5.7 5.7 7.4 9.5

Over 85... 2.1 1.9 2.1 1.9 1.9 3.8 2.0 4.9 1.4 4.3

______________________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Report, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

Racial distribution of deaths for the five‑year period of 1978 to 1982 (Table 6.6) indicates that in 1978 Chamorro deaths were almost 6 times greater than the next highest racial group, Caucasians. For 1979, Chamorros accounted for 64 percent of all deaths ‑ just over 5 times more than the deaths of the next highest race, Filipinos. In 1980, Chamorros were 61 percent of all deaths, with Filipinos second at 15 percent of deaths. Chamorro deaths were over 4 times higher than Filipino deaths that year.

Table 6.6 Deaths by Race: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Number Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Race 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total... 424 377 422 406 443 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Chamorro.. 278 242 256 249 306 65.6 64.2 60.7 61.3 69.1

Filipino.. 39 46 62 57 54 9.2 12.2 14.7 14.0 12.2

Caucasian. 50 44 45 47 40 11.8 11.7 10.7 11.6 9.0

Micronesn. 32 26 36 23 25 7.5 6.9 8.5 5.7 5.6

Asian..... 14 12 16 22 9 3.3 3.2 3.8 5.4 2.0

All Others 10 6 7 8 9 2.4 1.6 1.7 2.0 2.0

Not Reptd. 1 1 0 0 0 .2 .3 0.0 0.0 0.0

_________________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Report, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

In the previous three years, 1978 to 1980, it appeared that Chamorro deaths were on the decline, but in 1981, figures rose appreciably, to 61 percent of deaths, then dramatically in 1982, to 69 percent of deaths.

Percentages show that the racial groups, other than Chamorros, were relatively stable in their respective proportions of deaths for the five‑year period.

In relation to the age structure, 4 percent of the total Chamorro population were of persons 65 years and older in 1980 (Table 6.7). By contrast, this same age group contributed 47 percent of all Chamorro deaths that year. The next two younger age categories (55 to 64 years and 45 to 54 years) had the next highest percentages of deaths at 18 and 10 percent, respectively. (Table 6.8). As with the first age groups, the latter two age groups were also small in their percentage of population distribution; 4 percent for the group 55 to 64 years, and 7 percent for those 45 to 54 years.

Table 6.7 Age by Race: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Cham‑ Fili‑ All Not

Age Group Total orro pino White Others Rptd

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All ages........ 105979 47845 22447 19751 8786 7150

Percent....... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs... 12.3 13.2 11.0 12.9 10.3 10.8

5 to 14 yrs....... 22.6 28.4 19.4 16.2 18.4 16.6

15 to 19 yrs...... 10.4 13.2 7.8 7.9 8.0 9.4

20 to 24 yrs...... 10.5 8.3 6.4 18.4 8.5 18.7

25 to 34 yrs...... 18.5 13.6 18.7 26.0 23.8 23.5

35 to 44 yrs...... 10.7 8.3 12.8 11.2 16.4 11.6

45 to 54 yrs...... 7.7 7.1 12.1 4.2 9.8 5.1

55 to 64 yrs...... 4.5 4.3 8.1 2.2 3.7 2.7

65 yrs. and older. 2.8 3.6 3.8 .9 1.2 1.6

_______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 21

By comparison, Filipinos aged 65 years and older constituted about the same proportion of their ethnic group as did Chamorros, 4 percent. Likewise, the same observation as with Chamorros can be made in regard to deaths, since Filipinos in the age group 65 and older had the highest percentage of total deaths. The next lower age groups, 55 to 64 years, also had the next highest percentage of total deaths with 19. However, Filipinos in the age groups 5 years and under, with a slightly lower percentage of 18, were the third highest in total deaths.

The inverse correlation between the relatively small proportion of persons in the oldest age group and the higher proportion of deaths attributed to that age group is understandable because older people are more prone to disease, particularly chronic disease, than younger people. Two prominent factors that bear upon this demographic phenomenon are poor environmental and sanitation conditions that existed before 1950, and the lack of proper nutrition, especially during the Japanese occupation of Guam. At least with those 65 years and older in 1980 ‑ that is, those born in 1915 or earlier ‑ these factors would presumably contribute to their deaths; however, only an analysis of cause of death variables will give greater credence to this assumption.

In 1980, children less than 5 years old were only 9 percent of all Chamorro deaths, while Filipinos had twice that percentage (18 percent) (Table 6.8). Deaths to Whites less than 5 years old were only a little lower (16 percent), and "All Others" showed 22 percent. As these data do not separate infant (less than 1 year) deaths from other deaths to those less than 5 years, it is not known what proportion infant deaths contribute to all deaths in this age group.

In other age groups, specifically those 25 to 34 years and 55 to 64 years, Whites showed a high percentage in comparison to the other racial groups. Nearly 18 percent of deaths to Whites in 1980 were to those 25 to 34 years old, which was nearly treble the figure for Filipinos or Chamorros. Moreover, in the age group 55 to 64 years, Whites had the highest percentage, at 20 percent. These high proportions, however, may be a result of the small numbers of Whites, rather than a true picture of Whites' mortality.

Table 6.8 Deaths by Race and Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Cham‑ Fili‑ All

Age Group Total orro pino White Others

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All ages........ 422 256 62 45 59

Percent....... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs... 12.8 9.0 17.7 15.6 22.0

5 to 14 yrs....... 2.6 1.6 3.2 2.2 6.8

15 to 19 yrs...... 2.4 2.0 3.2 2.2 3.4

20 to 24 yrs...... 3.6 3.1 1.6 6.7 5.1

25 to 34 yrs...... 7.8 5.5 4.8 17.8 13.6

35 to 44 yrs...... 5.9 4.3 8.1 8.9 8.5

45 to 54 yrs...... 11.4 10.2 11.3 11.1 16.9

55 to 64 yrs...... 18.5 18.0 19.4 20.0 18.6

65 yrs. and older. 35.1 46.5 30.6 15.6 5.1

_______________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Report, Office of Vital

Statistics, Department of Public Health and Social

Services, Guam.

It is not known whether the data in Table 6.8 discussed in the preceding paragraphs are anomalies for the year 1980, or if they represent a trend in deaths by age and race. In any event, these tabulations indicate areas which might interest health researchers as well as demographers.

LEADING CAUSES OF DEATH

In the period 1981 to 1985 (Table 6.9) the two leading causes of death on Guam were heart disease and cancer, which placed first and second, respectively. These diseases accounted for 880 deaths (572 heart disease related deaths and 308 cancer related deaths) in the five‑year period. Cerebrovascular diseases ranked third in 1981, 1982, and 1985, and fourth in 1983 and 1984. In total, cerebrovascular diseases accounted for 139 deaths in the period, making it the third leading cause of death on Guam.

Other leading causes for the same period were motor vehicle accidents with 107 deaths, which placed it fourth overall, "other accidents" (drowning, electrocutions, etc.) at 104 deaths, and diabetes at 95 deaths.

Table 6.9 Leading Causes of Death: 1981 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Cause of Death Totl Rnk 1981 Rnk 1982 Rnk 1983 Rnk 1984 Rnk 1985 Rnk

All Causes.... 2202 ... 406 ... 443 ... 462 ... 450 ... 441 ...

Diseases of Heart. 572 1 96 1 116 1 137 1 113 1 110 1

Neoplasms (Cancer). 308 2 58 2 64 2 60 2 60 2 66 2

Cerebrovsclr Dis. . 139 3 31 3 25 3 22 4 30 4 31 3

Othr Disease of Cntrl

Nervous System... 83 7 12 7 24 4 15 9 15 8 17 8

Diabetes Mellitus.... 95 6 11 9 17 5 15 8 30 3 22 4

All Other Accidents..104 5 26 4 16 6 18 5 23 6 21 6

Chronic Liver Disease

and Cirrhosis.... 40 10 14 6 15 7 ... ... 11 9 ... ...

Motor Vehicle Acc. 107 4 21 5 11 8 29 3 25 5 21 5

Pneumonia......... 46 8 ... ... 10 9 17 6 ... ... 19 7

Suicide............ 20 ... ... ... 9 10 ... ... ... ... 11 10

Homicide........... 46 8 12 8 .. ... 16 7 18 7 ... ...

Perinatal Cond..... 30 ... 9 10 ... ... 12 10 9 10 ... ...

Congenital Anomalies 12 .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 12 9

All Other Causes... 600 ... 116 ... 136 ... 121 ... 116 ... 111 ...

_____________________________________________________________________________

Note: Rank order is for top ten causes only.

"..." Not included in top ten causes.

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, Department

of Public Health and Social Services, Government of Guam.

At the present time, the Office of Vital Statistics does not report statistics on cause of death by race, sex, or age. These variables can be obtained, and in fact, it is anticipated that the compilation, analysis, and tabulation of such variables will be accomplished in the latter part of 1988; these statistics will be maintained thereafter.

LIFE TABLE ANALYSIS

Abridged life tables for Guam that were done for the period 1969 to 1971 and 1979 to 1981 (Flores), show that life expectancy at birth for both sexes combined increased by 5.8 years, from 66.5 in the first life table period to 72.3 years in the second (See Appendix D). This increase in life expectancy is attributable to the establishment of social and public health programs aimed at specific age groups such as mothers and infants. From their inception in the late 1960s and early 1970s, such programs proved to be beneficial to Guam's overall population in terms of public education and public assistance ‑ target groups were then able to improve their quality of living by altering their diets and availing themselves of the improved medical and public health facilities and services.

In comparing both sexes, it is interesting to note that although females at birth had a better life expectancy (72.5 years for 1969‑71 and 75.6 years for 1979‑81 compared to 64.4 and 69.5 years for males for the same periods), in the ten years between the two life tables female life expectancy improved by 3.1 years, compared to 5.2 years for males.

Life expectancy of women in the childbearing years (15 to 45 years of age) improved by an average of 2.5 years. In some age categories the tables showed more improvement in life expectancy overall for males than for females; 3.1 years at age 25 for males as compared to 2.4 years for females; 3.1 years at age 35 for males to 2.5 years for females; 2.9 years at age 55 for males as compared to 1.9 years for females are some examples.

However, in other age categories the tables show that females aged 75 showed an increase of 4.0 years in ten years as compared to males with only 1.1 years increase. At age 85, males showed a decrease in life expectancy of 1.8 years, whereas females increased by 1.0 years.

Life tables were constructed for the "Chamorro‑Guamanian" and "Non‑Chamorro‑Guamanian" components of the population of Guam by Taylor (1985) (Appendix D), and reveal higher mortality in the "Chamorro‑Guamanian" population than in the total population for 1979‑81. The life expectancy at birth of the "Chamorro‑Guamanian" population in this table was 69.5 years; for the "Non‑Chamorro‑Guamanian" it was 74.9 years. The differences in life expectancy between these two populations of 5.4 years was all attributable to differences in adult mortality (age greater than 15 years). "Ethnic differences in age‑specific death rates were most marked between age 25‑35 years, although higher mortality in "Chamorro‑Guamanian" compared to others persisted through middle age." (Taylor, 1985:37)

In general, male life expectancy on Guam is increasing more quickly than female, although the reasons are only speculative. Finally, Guam, in comparison to other Pacific Island populations, has the highest life expectancy at birth: 73 years, with American Samoa second at 70 years (as reported for 1978‑82) (South Pacific Commission, 1987). It appears that where health systems are heavily financed from external sources, such as in Guam and American Samoa, life expectancy figures rise into the high 60s and low 70s, and IMRs of less than 20 occur.

SUMMARY

In summary it might be said that improved living conditions were significant factors in bringing mortality levels on Guam to one of the lowest in the Pacific region. However, it can also be said that, at least where Chamorros are concerned, many deaths are probably due to the change in lifestyle, with chronic disease and cancer taking a preponderance of lives in the later age groups, 45 years and over. It is in this age group that many tend to become sedentary and are more prone to stress and chronic alcoholism.

The decline in mortality on Guam actually began during the first three decades of this century. This is, to a large extent, despite the characteristics of the Chamorro population, which, by most measures, indicate a slightly higher level of mortality than other racial groups on Guam. But the increasing differences between life expectancies at birth for Chamorro males and females appear to indicate that the decline in mortality has come to an end, at least as far as the Chamorro male population is concerned.

Female life expectancy seems to have remained fairly constant at about 75 years. The persistence of the sex differential in life expectancy, past and present, is a consequence of the differences in adult life expectancy.

A final word on death by cause is given as a recommendation for vital registration data:

"Although the 'Top Ten' causes of death for all ages and both sexes combined gives some information on the main health problems in the Guam population it makes more sense to separate cause of death data by major age group (and also by sex for adults) because there are significant differences between the various subgroups..."

"Although such a summary tabulation provides more information than the 'Top Ten' causes of death with all ages and both sexes lumped together, the deaths are not 'weighted' by the age at which they occur. Particularly from an economic perspective, premature death in working age adults (age 15 to 64) needs to be 'age weighted'. This can be achieved by calculating the years of life lost by cause." (Taylor, 1985:50)

CHAPTER 7

MIGRATION

In Chapters 5 and 6 we discussed two basic components of population growth, fertility and mortality. The other basic factor of population growth is migration. The measurement of migration is more complex than the measurement of fertility and mortality. The reasons for this are obvious. Mortality is purely a biological phenomenon ‑ favorable socio‑economic climate and medical/health care can postpone it but cannot stop it. Fertility, which can now be controlled, reflects the levels of material wellbeing of a population, and is also a biological phenomenon, affected by individual and societal needs, level of scientific knowledge and economic status. The problems of measurement of fertility and mortality arise basically because of lack of reliable data of vital events.

Migration, on the other hand, is a socio‑economic phenomenon which is a result of a complex mechanism involving social, psychological, economic, political, institutional and other determinants. Migration affects the size, structure, and growth of populations; it has produced remarkable alterations in the structure and distribution of the population of Guam.

Migration also affects the size of the labor force, the distribution of labor force by skill, education, industry and occupation, employment status, savings, investment and productivity, and as a factor that has social and psychological bearings on the communities at both the origin and destination of the migrants.

Migration involves change from a usual place of residence. Migration can be internal (within the national or territorial boundaries) or international (across international borders). A migrant who travels from an area of origin to a destination is an immigrant or inmigrant with respect to the area of destination, and an emigrant or outmigrant with respect to place of origin (in each case, the former term used for international migration, the latter used for internal migration).

PLACE OF BIRTH

Data on Place of Birth were derived from answers to question 10.

Respondents were instructed to report place of birth in terms of mother's usual place of residence at the time of the birth rather than in terms of place of location of the hospital if the birth occurred in a hospital. In this report, the population is classified in the following groups: persons born on a selected island in the Pacific, persons born in the United States, and persons born elsewhere. Persons born elsewhere were asked to report country of birth according to international boundaries recognized by the United States government on April 1, 1980 since boundaries of foreign countries have changed in the last century. Some of these persons may have reported their country of birth in terms of boundaries that existed at the time of their birth or immigration, or in accordance with their own national preference. Selected countries of birth are shown here.

Place of birth was not allocated for Guam. Persons not reporting place of birth are shown separately in the tables under "Place of birth not reported".

CITIZENSHIP AND YEAR OF IMMIGRATION

Data on citizenship and year of immigration were derived from answers to questions 11 and 12. Persons who were born in Puerto Rico, American Samoa, or the Virgin Islands of the United States, or born abroad or at sea and who had at least one parent who was a U.S. citizen were to report themselves as a U.S. Citizen.

Citizenship. Information on citizenship was used to classify the population of Guam born outside Guam or the United States into four major categories: naturalized citizens of the United States, permanent U.S. aliens (visa), temporary U.S. aliens (work permit), and other U.S. citizens. A similar question on citizenship was asked in 1970.

If citizenship was not reported, a response was assigned by computer using the responses of other persons based on year of immigration and country of birth.

Year of immigration. Persons born outside Guam were to indicate in question 12 the period which includes the year they came to stay permanently on Guam. A question on year of immigration was asked in 1970. If year of immigration was not reported, a response was assigned using responses of other persons based on age and place of birth.

PLACE OF BIRTH OF PARENTS

The data on place of birth of parents were derived from the answers to questions 13 and 14. These questions were asked for the first time in the 1980 census. Information on place of birth of parents was used to classify the population of Guam according to the place where the person's parents were born.

Persons with one or both parents born elsewhere were asked to report the country of birth according to international boundaries as recognized by the United States government on April 1, 1980. Place of birth of parents was not allocated for nonresponse. Selected areas of birth are shown here.

RESIDENCE IN 1975

The data on residence in 1975 were derived from answers to questions 15a, 15b, and 15c. Persons living on Guam or one of the areas listed in question 15b in 1975 were asked to report the village or major island or atoll, or U. S. state. Persons living elsewhere were asked to report the foreign country in which they were living. Residence in 1975 is used in conjunction with current residence to determine the extent of residential mobility of the population. When no information on residence in 1975 was collected for a person, information for other members was used, if available. All cases of no response, or incomplete response not assigned based on information from other family members, were shown separately as "Residence in 1975 not reported."

The number of persons who were living in a different house in 1975 was somewhat less than the total number of moves during the 5 year period. Some persons in the same house at the two dates had moved during the 5 year period but by the time of enumeration had returned to their 1975 residence. Other persons who were living in a different house had made one or more intermediate moves. For similar reasons, the number of persons living in a different Election District may be underestimated.

Similarly, questions on mobility were asked in the 1970 census; however, in the 1970 census the questions did not ask for residence in the specific village on Guam as did question 15c in the 1980 census. Data by village were not tabulated.

PLACE OF BIRTH CHARACTERISTICS

Almost half of the 105,979 persons living on Guam in 1980 were born on Guam. After the Guam‑born, the next largest part of the population were born on the U.S. (about 1 in 5), followed by persons born in Asia (also 1 in 5). Most (about 3 in every 4) of the Asia‑born were born in the Philippines; in fact, about 1 in every 6 persons living on Guam in 1980 were born in the Philippines. While about 2 percent of Guam's 1980 population was born in the Northern Mariana Islands, less than 1 percent was born in Palau, and even smaller numbers had been born in the other areas of the Trust Territory.

The largest number of persons of each sex were born on Guam, but greater proportions of females were born here (52 percent) than males (46 percent). The United States was the second most popular male birthplace (24 percent), while Asia was third (21 percent); this order was reversed for females. In fact, while about 1 in every 4 males were born in the United Staes, less than 1 in 5 of the females were born there.

Table 7.1. Birthplace by Sex: 1980

Numbers Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Birthplace Total Males Females Total Males Females

Total...................... 105979 55321 50658 100.0 100.0 100.0

Guam............................ 52113 25594 26519 49.2 46.3 52.3

Northern Mariana Islands........ 2124 999 1125 2.0 1.8 2.2

Asia............................ 22648 11491 11157 21.4 20.8 22.0

Philippines................... 16998 8985 8013 16.0 16.2 15.8

United States................... 22950 13451 9499 21.7 24.3 18.8

Palau........................... 921 391 530 .9 .7 1.0

Marshall Islands................ 39 19 20 .0 .0 .0

Federated States of Micronesia.. 436 237 199 .4 .4 .4

Kosrae........................ 65 48 17 .1 .1 .0

Pohnpei....................... 111 51 60 .1 .1 .1

Truk.......................... 121 68 53 .1 .1 .1

Yap........................... 139 70 69 .1 .1 .1

Elsewhere....................... 1477 693 784 1.4 1.3 1.5

Place of Birth Not Reported..... 3271 2446 825 3.1 4.4 1.6

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24

When persons born in Guam are excluded, a clearer picture of the immigrants emerges (Table 7.2). As noted above, more than half of the population of Guam was born outside Guam. Most were born in the U.S. (43 percent) or Asia (42 percent). Males followed the pattern of the total population, but the distribution of birthplaces for females differed: Asia was the most common non‑Guam birthplace (46 percent), with the U.S. second (39 percent). Over 2 percent of females were born in Palau, but only 1 percent of males had been; a higher percentage of females had been born in the CNMI (5 percent) than had males (3 percent).

Table 7.2. Birthplace by Sex for the Non‑Guam Born: 1980

Numbers Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Birthplace Total Males Females Total Males Females

Total...................... 105979 55321 50658 100.0 100.0 100.0

Guam............................ 52113 25594 26519 ... ... ...

Northern Mariana Islands........ 2124 999 1125 3.9 3.4 4.7

Asia............................ 22648 11491 11157 42.0 38.7 46.2

Philippines................... 16998 8985 8013 31.6 30.2 33.2

United States................... 22950 13451 9499 42.6 45.2 39.4

Palau........................... 921 391 530 1.7 1.3 2.2

Marshall Islands................ 39 19 20 .1 .1 .1

Federated States of Micronesia.. 436 237 199 .8 .8 .8

Elsewhere....................... 1477 693 784 2.7 2.3 3.2

Place of Birth Not Reported..... 3271 2446 825 6.1 8.2 3.4

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24

Birthplace by military status and sex is shown in Table 7.3 and Figure 7.1. Nearly 60 percent of the civilian population was born on Guam, followed by Asia (24 percent). Just over 10 percent of the military population had been born on Guam. Almost 65 percent of the military population was born in the U.S. compared to 10 percent of the civilian population. Although almost 1 in 4 of the civilians were born in Asia, this was true for only 1 in 8 of the military. Similarly, percentage of Philippines born civilians (18 percent) was twice 9 percent for the military. Also, although CNMI born made up 2.5 percent of the civilians, they were only .3 percent of the military, perhaps not surprising since they were not yet American citizens and thus had difficulty enlisting in the military.

The were differences for birthplace by sex in 1980. Although 58 percent of the civilian males were born on Guam, more than 61 percent of the females were in this category. On the other hand, 19 percent of the civilian males were Philippines born compared to 17 percent of the civilian females; the civilian United States percentages were 11 and 9, respectively. For the military, 8 percent of the males and 13 percent of the females were born on Guam, compared to 67 percent of the males and 62 percent of the females being United States born. Also, while 18 percent of the military females were born in Asia, this was true for only 9 percent of the males.

Many military personnel did not report a place of birth. The percentage was higher for males (13 percent) than for females (3 percent). These high proportions affect the proportions of the population distributed to each birthplace.

Table 7.3. Birthplace by Military Status and Sex: 1980

Total Civilian Military

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Birthplace Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

Total........105979 55321 50658 83226 42056 41170 22753 13265 9488

Percent.... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Guam.............. 49.2 46.3 52.3 59.8 58.2 61.4 10.3 8.5 12.9

Northern Marianas. 2.0 1.8 2.2 2.5 2.3 2.6 .3 .2 .5

Asia.............. 21.4 20.8 22.0 23.8 24.6 23.0 12.4 8.6 17.7

Philippines..... 16.0 16.2 15.8 18.0 19.2 16.7 8.9 6.8 11.8

United States..... 21.7 24.3 18.8 9.8 10.9 8.7 64.9 66.8 62.2

Palau............. .9 .7 1.0 1.0 .9 1.2 .3 .2 .4

Marshall Islands.. .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0

FSMicronesia...... .4 .4 .4 .5 .5 .5 .1 .1 .1

Elsewhere......... 1.4 1.3 1.5 .9 .8 1.0 3.2 2.7 3.8

Not Reported...... 3.1 4.4 1.6 1.6 1.7 1.4 8.6 13.0 2.5

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24

When only the migrant population is considered, as noted earlier, the most frequent place of birth reported shifts from Guam to the U.S. (43 percent) and Asia (42 percent) (Table 7.4). Civilian migrants of both sexes came from Asia (60 percent of females and 59 percent of males), the U.S. (23 percent of females and 26 percent of males), and the Northern Marianas Islands (7 percent of females and 6 percent of males). Higher percentages of the military were born in the U.S. (73 percent for males and 71 percent for females) than any other place of birth reported, with Asia second (9 percent of the males and 20 percent of the females).

The military again had a large proportion of 'not reported' birthplaces, but the increase in the proportions for the migrant military population was only slightly over 1 percent from that of the total military population. However, the proportion of 'not reported' in the overall migrant population was nearly double that of the total population.

Table 7.4. Birthplace by Military Status and Sex for the Non‑Guam Born:

1980

Total Civilian Military

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Birthplace Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

Total........ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Northern Marianas. 3.9 3.4 4.7 6.1 5.5 6.8 .3 .2 .5

Asia.............. 42.0 38.7 46.2 59.3 58.9 59.7 13.8 9.4 20.3

Philippines..... 31.6 30.2 33.2 44.8 46.0 43.4 9.9 7.4 13.5

United States..... 42.6 45.2 39.4 24.5 26.1 22.7 72.3 72.9 71.4

Palau............. 1.7 1.3 2.2 2.6 2.1 3.1 .3 .2 .4

Marshall Islands.. .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .0 .0 .0

FSMicronesia...... .8 .8 .8 1.2 1.3 1.2 .1 .1 .1

Elsewhere......... 2.7 2.3 3.2 2.3 1.9 2.6 3.5 2.9 4.4

Not Reported...... 6.1 8.2 3.4 3.9 4.1 3.7 9.6 14.2 2.9

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24

Age. Most of the Guam‑born were young: over 60 percent were below the age of 19, while this was true of 45 percent of the total population, but only 22 percent of those born in the Philippines (Table 7.5). Nearly 56 percent of those born in the U.S. were between 20 and 44 years of age; those 20 to 24 years were the largest single age group of U.S. born. As was seen in Table 7.3, 65 percent of the military on Guam in 1980 were U.S. born; the most common ages for entry into military service are 18 to 24.

The largest percentages of Philippine‑born immigrants were between 35 to 44 years (17 percent) and 45 to 54 (16 percent), followed by 30 to 34 (12 percent) and 25 to 29 (11 percent). These persons almost certainly migrated for work. The Philippines born had greater proportions of elderly than those born in any other place. These elderly may have migrated in the late 1960's, after immigration laws were changed, with these people being in their mid‑40's, or they may be older relatives of other migrants who had them brought over to live here.

Table 7.5. Birthplace by Age: 1980

Phili‑ United All

Age Group Total Guam CNMI ppines States Palau FSM Others

All persons... 105979 52113 2124 16998 22950 921 475 10398

Percent..... 100.0 100.0100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 years. 12.3 18.4 8.5 2.2 9.9 3.3 4.0 5.4

5 to 9 years...... 11.9 15.9 10.0 4.5 10.2 2.9 5.1 9.4

10 to 14 years.... 10.7 13.9 12.2 6.8 7.4 6.4 6.7 8.4

15 to 19 years.... 10.4 12.1 13.2 8.1 8.5 10.1 10.7 9.2

20 to 24 years.... 10.5 7.2 10.8 7.2 17.9 14.3 25.1 14.8

25 to 29 years.... 9.7 6.6 10.6 11.2 14.2 15.7 16.0 12.4

30 to 34 years.... 8.8 5.4 9.5 12.2 11.9 10.7 9.7 12.5

35 to 44 years.... 10.7 7.2 11.1 16.5 11.6 16.6 11.8 15.7

45 to 54 years.... 7.7 6.2 8.5 15.7 4.8 13.5 4.6 8.0

55 to 59 years.... 2.7 2.2 1.6 6.7 1.6 2.6 1.5 1.9

60 to 64 years.... 1.8 1.7 1.8 3.8 1.0 1.8 2.5 1.0

65 years and over. 2.8 3.3 2.2 5.0 .9 2.0 2.3 1.3

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 20

While the Guam‑born made up just over 49 percent of the total population in 1980, they were 74 percent of those less than 5 years of age, and 66 percent of those 5 to 9 years. In fact, they were the majority of all ages up to 19 years, and from age 25 to 54, stressing the youthfulness of the Guam‑born population. In the age group 20 to 24 years, the prime military years, the U.S. born were in the majority; for those 55 to 59 years, those born in the Philippines accounted for about the same proportion as the Guam‑born.

The elderly (60 years and over) were heavily Guam‑born, followed by the Philippines born. Those born in the CNMI, Palau, and the Federated States of Micronesia (FSM) were concentrated in the college and working ages (15 to 54 years); those born in "All Others" places of birth had 20 percent of their population less than 15 years of age.

Table 7.6. Percent Birthplace by Age: 1980

Phili‑ United All

Age Group Total Guam CNMI ppines States Palau FSM Others

All persons... 100.0 49.2 2.0 16.0 21.7 .9 .4 9.8

Less than 5 years. 100.0 73.6 1.4 2.9 17.5 .2 .1 4.3

5 to 9 years...... 100.0 65.6 1.7 6.0 18.5 .2 .2 7.7

10 to 14 years.... 100.0 64.1 2.3 10.2 15.0 .5 .3 7.7

15 to 19 years.... 100.0 57.1 2.5 12.5 17.8 .8 .5 8.7

20 to 24 years.... 100.0 33.7 2.1 11.1 37.1 1.2 1.1 13.8

25 to 29 years.... 100.0 33.2 2.2 18.5 31.5 1.4 .7 12.5

30 to 34 years.... 100.0 30.5 2.2 22.3 29.5 1.1 .5 14.0

35 to 44 years.... 100.0 33.3 2.1 24.8 23.5 1.4 .5 14.4

45 to 54 years.... 100.0 39.7 2.2 32.7 13.4 1.5 .3 10.2

55 to 59 years.... 100.0 39.0 1.2 39.3 12.7 .8 .2 6.7

60 to 64 years.... 100.0 44.9 2.0 33.8 12.3 .9 .6 5.4

65 years and over. 100.0 57.2 1.6 28.7 7.0 .6 .4 4.6

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 20

YEAR OF IMMIGRATION

Just over 54 percent of all immigrants came to Guam after 1977, with more coming in 1979 or 1980 than in any other period, and the 1977‑78 period being second. The decade 1960 to 1969 was the third most frequent period of immigration. Those born in the CNMI came most often in 1979 or 1980 (29 percent), followed by 1960 to 1969; the Philippines born were more likely to have immigrated in the earlier period than the latter. Nearly 74 percent of the U.S. born had come to Guam between 1977 and 1980; as many U.S. born were military, and subject to short‑term stays, this is not an unusual finding. Those from Palau and the FSM had patterns of immigration similar to those from the Philippines: the period when the majority migrated was the decade 1960‑69, followed by 1979 or 1980.

Table 7.7. Year of Immigration by Birthplace: 1980

Asia

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Phili‑ United All

Age Group Total CNMI Total ppines States Palau FSM Others

Born elsewhere.. 50595 2124 22648 16998 22950 921 436 1516

Percent...... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

1979 or 1980...... 30.3 29.3 18.1 16.8 42.6 14.9 28.9 36.2

1977 or 1978...... 24.1 14.3 18.2 16.4 31.0 12.4 21.8 29.4

1975 or 1976...... 9.2 6.9 12.1 9.6 6.7 7.5 13.1 7.3

1973 or 1974...... 7.5 5.1 11.0 9.8 4.3 7.5 7.6 6.9

1971 or 1972...... 6.6 4.8 9.8 9.3 3.9 6.2 5.5 4.4

1970.............. 3.2 2.5 4.5 5.1 2.0 4.6 2.5 3.1

1960 to 1969...... 12.5 20.8 17.7 22.0 6.4 27.9 7.6 8.6

1950 to 1959...... 3.8 7.7 4.8 6.0 2.1 13.4 4.1 2.6

Before 1950....... 2.8 8.6 3.9 5.0 1.0 5.8 8.9 1.6

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 27

As can be seen in Table 7.8, in any the broad year spans, the majority of immigrants were born in the Philippines, except for the years 1975 to 1980, when over 57 percent of immigrants were from the U.S. This large proportion undoubtedly is related to movements of military personnel who move on to and off of the island at fairly frequent intervals ‑ while the relative number of military on island may fluctuate somewhat over time, the absolute numbers of military and their dependents is much larger and influences period of "migration" to Guam.

The proportion of the population who migrated from the Northern Marianas was greatest in the period before 1950 (13 percent of the population which migrated during that period) which was probably partly due to family unification, particularly after World War II. Migration from CNMI decreased considerably as a proportion of the total immigrant population by period, but began to increase slightly in the last period before the 1980 census. Migration from the other areas of Micronesia was limited, but the implementation of the compacts may have an impact on the amount of migration from these areas.

Table 7.8. Period of Immigration by Birthplace: 1980

Asia

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Phili‑ United All

Age Group Total CNMI Total ppines States Palau FSM Others

Born elsewhere.. 100.0 4.2 44.8 33.6 45.4 1.8 .9 3.0

1975 to 1980...... 100.0 3.3 34.1 22.6 57.3 1.0 .9 3.4

1970 to 1974...... 100.0 3.0 65.1 46.8 26.7 1.9 .8 2.5

1960 to 1969...... 100.0 7.0 63.2 59.1 23.2 4.1 .5 2.0

1950 to 1959...... 100.0 8.6 56.6 53.9 25.3 6.4 .9 2.1

Before 1950....... 100.0 13.0 62.4 60.5 16.3 3.8 2.8 1.7

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 27

Table 7.9 shows the total immigrant population (non‑Guam born) and the Guam born by age group and year of immigration for the non‑Guam born. The Guam born were just over half of the total population and dominated the age groups less than 19 years and 65 years and over, which comprise most of the non‑working ages. Migrants made up anywhere from 68 percent (those 30 to 34 years) to 54 percent (60 to 64 years) of the working age population.

The period 1975 to 1980 was the most active period of immigration for all age groups of migrants; the second most active period was 1970 to 1974. Those who were 25 years and over in 1980 migrated to Guam during their working ages, with very few coming at the time they were less than 10 years old. Those who were 25 to 29 in 1980 came most often in 1975 to 1980, when they were 20 to 25 years old (78 percent), followed by 1970 to 1974, when they were 15 to 19 years old (14 percent). Those 65 and older in 1980 had the most evenly distributed periods of immigration: 33 percent had come between 1975 to 1980 (when they were age 60 and older), 21 percent before 1950 (when they were age 35 and over), and 20 percent came between 1970 to 1974 (when they were 55 years and over).

Table 7.9. Year of Immigration by Age: 1980

Year of Immigration for non‑Guam born

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Guam 1975‑ 1970‑ 1960‑ 1950‑ Before

Age Group Total Born Total 1980 1974 1969 1959 1950

All persons...102,708 50.7 100.0 63.6 17.4 12.5 3.8 2.8

Less than 5 years. 12,797 74.7 100.0 97.8 1.9 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 to 9 years...... 12,453 66.6 100.0 84.2 15.4 0.0 0.0 0.0

10 to 14 years.... 11,168 65.1 100.0 63.0 25.5 11.5 0.0 0.0

15 to 19 years.... 10,605 59.2 100.0 59.1 21.1 19.7 0.0 0.0

20 to 24 years.... 10,194 36.7 100.0 81.2 10.0 7.2 1.5 0.0

25 to 29 years.... 9,910 34.5 100.0 77.8 13.8 6.5 2.0 0.0

30 to 34 years.... 8,941 31.6 100.0 66.2 19.9 11.7 1.7 0.6

35 to 44 years.... 10,919 34.5 100.0 49.6 23.0 22.5 3.3 1.7

45 to 54 years.... 8,025 40.5 100.0 30.1 21.0 24.1 14.8 9.9

55 to 59 years.... 2,866 39.7 100.0 25.7 19.7 18.5 16.6 19.4

60 to 64 years.... 1,899 45.6 100.0 30.7 18.2 16.4 16.9 17.8

65 years and over. 2,931 58.2 100.0 32.5 20.1 12.9 13.6 20.8

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 22

Note: Excludes Persons not Reporting Place of Birth

Nearly 73 percent of the non‑Guam born 16 years and older were in the labor force, compared to only 55 percent of the Guam born (Table 7.10). Most of the Guam born labor force was civilian (98 percent) and employed (95 percent), while 71 percent of the migrant labor force were civilian and 96 percent were employed.

Fully 73 percent of those migrating to Guam between 1975 and 1980 were in the labor force; over 47 percent were in the Armed Forces. Labor force participation rates for migrants from all periods were 72 percent or higher, with the highest rates among those who had migrated to Guam between 1950 to 1959.

Table 7.10. Year of Immigration by Labor Force Participation: 1980

Year of Immigration for non‑Guam born

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Guam 1975‑ 1970‑ 1960‑ 1950‑ Before

Labor Force Total Born Total 1980 1974 1969 1959 1950

Persons........ 66773 25577 38508 22619 6885 5692 1907 1405

Labor Force....... 44484 14019 28076 16501 4984 4081 1494 1016

Percent....... 66.6 54.8 72.9 73.0 72.4 71.7 78.3 72.3

Armed Forces.... 10125 264 8165 7765 220 118 43 19

Percent....... 22.8 1.9 29.1 47.1 4.4 2.9 2.9 1.9

Civilian L.F.... 34359 13755 19911 8736 4764 3963 1451 997

Employed...... 32692 13001 19027 8181 4606 3840 1422 978

Unemployed.... 1667 754 884 555 158 123 29 19

Percent..... 4.9 5.5 4.4 6.4 3.3 3.1 2.0 1.9

Not in Labor Force 22289 11558 10432 6118 1901 1611 413 389

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 39

Note: Excludes Persons Not Reporting Place of Birth

PLACE OF BIRTH OF PARENTS

Unlike the 1980 census in the United States, the 1980 census on Guam collected information about father's and mother's birthplace. These data help assess generational migration; that is, parental birthplace information allows analysis of movement over one generation ‑ how many people had a father or mother born elsewhere and who were themselves born on Guam, compared to those who were themselves migrants, or native or native parents.

Once again, in 1980, 49 percent of Guam's population was born on Guam (Table 7.11). Although 52,113 persons had been born on Guam (Table 7.1), only 40,799 persons in 1980 had fathers who had been born on Guam, and, of these, 38,686 (95 percent) were born on Guam themselves. The other 5 percent were persons whose fathers were born on Guam but they were born elsewhere.

More than 4 in 10 persons whose fathers were born in the CNMI were born on Guam. About 94 percent of the rest of that population (1615 persons) were born in the CNMI, while the rest (102 persons) were born elsewhere. Of the largest groups, persons whose fathers had been born in the United States but who were themselves born on Guam constituted the smallest proportion ‑ only 13 percent. Of the 21,270 persons who were not born on Guam and with fathers who were born int he United States, 19,604 (92 percent) were born in the United States as well.

About 1 in every 4 persons with Asia‑born fathers were born on Guam; of those not born on Guam themselves, 95 percent were born in Asia. Although a higher proportion of Pilippines born fathers had respondents born on Guam (30 percent), and the same proportion (94 percent) of the non‑Guam born were born in the Philippines.

The Marshall Islands figures are discounted since they are so small. Many Palauans have been on island long enough to see the second generational effect. More than 38 percent of persons with fathers born on Palau were born on Guam (although it is likely that most of these perosns are young children); of those with fathers born on Guam but who were not born on Guam themselves, 91 percent were born on Palau. The results for the Federated States of Micronesia showed a smaller proportion born on Guam, and less correspondance with parental birthplace.

Table 7.11. Father's Birthplace by Own Birthplace: 1980

Not Born on Guam

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Same as Not Same

Father's Father's

Birth‑ Birth‑

Father's Birthplace Total Guam Total Place place

Total...................... 105979 49.2 100.0 (NA) (NA)

Guam............................ 40799 94.8 100.0 0.0 100.0

Northern Mariana Islands........ 2949 41.8 100.0 94.1 5.9

Asia............................ 30246 26.6 100.0 94.7 5.3

Japan and Okinawa............. 1669 15.8 100.0 83.6 16.4

Philippines................... 24781 30.2 100.0 93.3 6.7

United States................... 24333 12.6 100.0 92.2 7.8

Palau........................... 1411 38.1 100.0 90.7 9.3

Marshall Islands................ 63 28.6 100.0 53.3 46.7

Federated States of Micronesia.. 518 27.4 100.0 76.9 23.1

Kosrae........................ 86 22.1 100.0 85.1 14.9

Pohnpei....................... 95 13.7 100.0 74.4 25.6

Truk.......................... 131 10.7 100.0 89.7 10.3

Yap........................... 206 46.6 100.0 60.0 40.0

Elsewhere....................... 2121 14.6 100.0 (NA) (NA)

Place of Birth Not Reported..... 3539 2.0 100.0 (NA) (NA)

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 25

Also, while 49 percent of Guam's population was born on Guam, while 40,799 persons in 1980 had fathers who had been born on Guam, 44,708 had mothers born on Guam. About the same proportion as for fathers ‑ 95 percent ‑ had mothers bron on Guam and were born on Guam themselves. The other 5 percent were persons whose mothers were born on Guam but they were born elsewhere.

As with the fathers, more than 4 in 10 persons whose mothers were born in the CNMI were born on Guam. About 92 percent of the rest of that population were born in the CNMI, while the rest were born elsewhere. The percentage of persons whose mothers had been born in the United States but who were themselves born on Guam constituted the smallest proportion for mothers than fathers ‑ only 8 percent. Of the persons who were not born on Guam and with mothers who were born in the United States, only 84 percent were born in the United States as well (compared to 92 percent of the fathers).

Only about 18 percent of those persons with Asia‑born mothers were born on Guam, probably showing the relatively earlier immigration of Asian males who subsequently married and had children (who, themselves, showed up in the 1980 census); of those not born on Guam themselves, 94 percent were born in Asia. Although a higher proportion of Philippines born mothers had respondents born on Guam (20 percent) compared to 30 percent for the males, and 95 percent of the non‑Guam born were born in the Philippines.

Table 7.12. Mother's Birthplace by Own Birthplace: 1980

Not Born in the Guam

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Same as Not Same

Mother's Mother's

Birth‑ Birth‑

Mother's Birthplace Total Guam Total Place place

Total...................... 105979 49.2 100.0 (NA) (NA)

Guam............................ 44708 95.4 100.0 0.0 100.0

Northern Mariana Islands........ 3190 40.7 100.0 92.5 7.5

Asia............................ 28630 18.5 100.0 93.5 6.5

Japan and Okinawa............. 2217 14.1 100.0 81.3 18.7

Philippines................... 22000 20.5 100.0 94.9 5.1

United States................... 21223 8.0 100.0 84.4 15.6

Palau........................... 1655 41.4 100.0 89.8 10.2

Marshall Islands................ 63 25.4 100.0 55.3 44.7

Federated States of Micronesia.. 574 28.2 100.0 78.4 21.6

Kosrae........................ 84 20.2 100.0 88.1 11.9

Pohnpei....................... 134 20.1 100.0 80.4 19.6

Truk.......................... 140 16.4 100.0 89.7 10.3

Yap........................... 216 44.0 100.0 60.3 39.7

Elsewhere....................... 2449 10.5 100.0 (NA) (NA)

Place of Birth Not Reported..... 3487 1.4 100.0 (NA) (NA)

Source: PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 25

These data on parental birthplace show that there is a strong likelihood that persons with parents born on Guam are also born on Guam themselves. Persons with parents born in most of the other areas were also likely to have been born in those areas themselves. On the other hand, there is some evidence that migrant groups who have been immigrating for some time are settling on Guam, and having children, and that we are seeing the development of an increasing second‑generation migrant population, particularly among the CNMI born and Palauans; the data are less clear for Asians because of the continuing strong migration. And migration from the other Micronesian areas is only beginning.

There were differences by sex of parent, with some evidence that there has been selective migration for males, particularly in the earlier periods; these data have been seen in other tables in this chapter as well.

RESIDENCE IN 1975

The question on residence in 1975 (5 years before the census) shows the extent of recent mobility of the population (Table 7.13). (While the distribution of persons who were living in a different house in 1975 than 1980 shows mobility, the total number of moves during the 5‑year period cannot be obtained because some persons had moved after 1975, but, by the time of enumeration, had returned to their 1975 residence).

Almost 4 out of every 10 persons 5 years and over and living on Guam in 1980 had lived in the same house in 1980. About 1 in every 4 lived on Guam, but in a different house, and about 3 in every 10 lived elsewhere. About 2 in 5 persons had lived int he United States in 1975and Guam in 1980, and somewhat less than 1 in 10 had been in Asia (and 1 in 20 in the Philippines) in 1975.

Only 4 percent of the 42,550 persons 5 years and over who had been born on Guam had lived outside of Guam in 1975; most (3 percent) had lived in the U.S. In direct contrast to this were those who had been born in the U.S., over 75 percent of whom had lived outside of Guam in 1975, mostly in the U.S. (68 percent) or Asia (4 percent). Slightly over 68 percent of those born in Palau had lived on Guam in 1975, as had 65 percent of the Philippines born and 57 percent of the CNMI born.

It is important to note that 4 percent of the respondents 5 years and over gave no residence in 1975. Although these responses, like those of the migration variables ‑ own birthplace and parental birthplace ‑ were allocated for the U.S. questionnaires, they were not allocated for the Guam census since there were so few persons who did not report (3,747 for this item). All of the figures discussed here are affected by the persons not reporting since (1) the category is treated as if it were a separate birthplace, and (2) there is an assumption that these unallocated values had the same distribution as the known values.

Table 7.13. Birthplace by Residence in 1975: 1980

Asia

Total ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ All

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ United Phil‑ Pa‑ Ot‑

Residence in 1975 Numbr Percnt Guam Sttes Total ppnes lau CNMI hers

Persons 5 yrs & over. 92977 ... 42550 20677 22019 16626 891 1944 4896

Percent.......... ... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0100.0100.0 100.0

Same house............. 35997 38.7 59.7 11.0 30.9 35.2 31.8 28.6 13.5

Different house in Guam 25050 26.9 34.6 13.0 29.0 29.6 36.4 28.3 7.4

Same Election dist... 13109 14.1 18.8 6.6 14.6 14.7 12.8 12.1 3.9

Different Elect dist. 11941 12.8 15.8 6.5 14.4 14.9 23.6 16.2 3.4

Outside Guam........... 28183 30.3 3.9 75.2 39.4 34.6 28.4 42.5 24.6

Asia................. 7742 8.3 .2 3.8 30.7 27.0 .1 .3 1.6

Japan and Okinawa.. 1006 1.1 .1 1.5 2.9 .5 .1 .2 .4

Korea.............. 848 .9 .0 .2 3.6 .0 0.0 .1 .1

Philippines........ 4706 5.1 .1 1.0 20.1 26.3 0.0 .1 .5

United States........ 17742 19.1 3.2 67.7 7.5 6.5 3.5 2.7 12.9

Northern Marianas.... 959 1.0 .2 .2 .2 .3 3.6 39.1 .2

Trust Territory...... 482 .5 .1 .2 .1 .0 21.1 .3 4.2

Palau.............. 255 .3 .0 .1 .0 .0 20.0 .2 .8

Marshall Is........ 21 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 0.0 0.0 .2

FSM................ 206 .2 .0 .1 .0 .0 1.1 .1 3.2

Elsewhere............ 1258 1.4 .2 3.3 .9 .8 .1 .2 5.7

Residence Not Reported. 3747 4.0 1.7 .8 .7 .7 3.5 .6 54.6

Source: PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 26

When the military population is removed (Table 7.14), the distribution of birthplace by residence in 1975 is affected. In this case, almost 48 percent (almost half) of the population 5 years and over rather than 39 percent lived in the same house in 1975 and 1980; similarly, 33 percent lived in a different house on Guam (compared to 27 percent for the whole population). On the other hand, only 17 percent of the civilian persons 5 years and over lived outside Guam in 1975, compared to 30 percent for the whole population. The biggest change by area outside Guam was for the United States, which decreased from 19 percent for all persons to only 6 percent when only the civilian population was considered.

The proportion of U.S. born civilians 5 years and over who lived on Guam in 1975 was 56 percent, over twice the percentage of all U.S. born who resided here in 1975. The U.S. born civilians who lived in the U.S. in 1975 was almost half of all U.S. born civilians who did so. The data for 'All Others' is similar to the U.S. born data, which is not surprising, as 53 percent of 'All Other' born were military. These data emphasize the mobility of the military population.

Table 7.14. Birthplace by Residence in 1975: 1980 Civilians

Asia

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ All

United Phili‑ Pa‑ Ot‑

Residence in 1975 Total Guam States Total ppines CNMI lau hers

Persons 5 yrs. & over. 73451 41252 7733 19423 14734 1885 836 2322

Percent........... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Same house............. 47.8 60.5 27.0 34.4 38.9 29.4 33.1 25.6

Different house/Guam... 32.6 34.6 29.5 32.0 32.5 28.4 37.2 14.6

Same Election dist... 16.9 18.8 13.5 16.1 16.2 12.3 13.4 7.5

Different Elect. dis. 15.7 15.8 16.0 15.9 16.3 16.2 23.8 7.1

Outside Guam........... 17.2 3.3 42.7 33.0 27.9 41.6 26.6 24.4

Asia................. 8.3 .2 3.3 29.5 25.5 .2 .1 2.4

Japan.............. .9 .1 1.3 2.6 .1 .1 .1 .5

Korea.............. 1.1 .0 .2 3.9 .0 0.0 0.0 .1

Philippines........ 5.3 .1 .9 19.4 25.3 .1 0.0 .8

United States........ 6.4 2.7 36.6 2.5 1.5 1.9 2.6 7.6

CNMI................. 1.3 .2 .3 .2 .3 39.2 3.6 .5

TTPI................. .6 .1 .5 .1 .1 .3 20.1 8.0

Palau.............. .3 .0 .2 .0 .0 .2 19.0 .4

Other Pacific Is..... .1 0.0 .2 .0 .0 .1 0.0 .9

Elsewhere............ .6 .2 1.9 .6 .5 .1 .1 5.0

Residence Not Reported. 2.3 1.6 .8 .6 .6 .5 3.1 35.5

____________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 26

RESIDENCE IN THE UNITED STATES BETWEEN 1970 AND 1980

One series of questions which appeared on the 1980 Census questionnaire for Guam but which did not appear on the questionnaire for the United States concerned residence in the United States (including Hawaii) in the 10 years preceding the 1980 census. This question had four parts:

a. During the last 10 years did...live in the United States (including Hawaii) at any time for 6 or more consecutive months?

b. When did...come or return to this territory the last time?

c. How long did...live in the United States the last time?

d. For the last 6 months that...lived in the United States was...‑

1. Working at a job or business (Full time or part time)?

2. In the U.S. armed forces?

3. Attending school or college?

These questions were intended to elicit information about the "circulatory" migration patterns of Guam's population. Many Pacific Islanders move back and forth between their home islands and larger nation‑states, primarily New Zealand and the United States (see, for example, Levin, Hayes, and Filiga, 1988, and *** additional reference for New Zealand ***). Planning and policy considerations require differing counts of the expected populations in Guam, so the amount of migration and the characteristics of the migrants are very important to the Territorial and Federal governments.

For the 1980 census of Guam, over 28,000 persons were recorded as having lived away from Guam between 1970 and 1980, returning most often in 1979 or 1980 (40 percent) or 1977 or 1978 (32 percent) (Table 7.15). There were no differences between year of return by sex. Those born on Guam returned most often between 1972 to 1974 or 1977 or 1978 (24 percent), while those born elsewhere returned during 1979 or 1980 (45 percent) or 1977 or 1978 (35 percent).

Table 7.15. Year of Return for Persons Living Away Between 1970 and

1980: 1980

Year of Total Born in Guam Born Elsewhere

Arrival or ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Return Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

Total....... 28138 15489 12649 5795 2997 2798 22343 12492 9851

Percent.... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

1979 or 1980.... 40.1 41.0 39.0 22.6 21.3 24.1 44.6 45.7 43.2

1977 or 1978.... 32.4 31.0 34.0 23.6 21.2 26.2 34.6 33.3 36.2

1975 or 1976.... 10.3 10.0 10.7 17.1 17.6 16.6 8.6 8.2 9.0

1972 to 1974.... 10.6 10.2 11.1 23.9 25.5 22.2 7.2 6.6 7.9

1970 or 1971.... 4.5 4.7 4.1 10.8 12.5 9.1 2.8 2.9 2.7

Yr not reported. 2.1 3.0 1.1 1.9 2.0 1.8 2.2 3.2 .9

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980, Table 152

Table 7.16 presents data on persons 5 years and over who lived in the U.S. for 6 or more consecutive months. The largest age group who lived in the U.S. were those 25 to 34 years old with 9,003 persons (32 percent). Of that total, 53 percent lived there 6 or more years, 26 percent lived there 6 months to 2 years, and 21 percent lived there 3 to 5 years. The second largest group were persons 15 to 24 years old with 7,712 persons (27 percent). Most of those living away did so for 6 or more years, with the exception of those less than 15 years old: their distribution was almost evenly split among the three time periods.

Table 7.16. Persons 5 Years and Over Who Lived in the United States

for 6 or more Consecutive Months Between 1970 and 1980

by Sex and Length of Last Stay in the U.S. by Age: 1980

Under 15 to 25 to 35 to 45

15 24 34 44 Years

Length of Stay Years Years Years Years Old and

in the U.S. Total Old Old Old Old Over

Total........ 28167 5534 7712 9003 3638 2280

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

6 months to 2 yrs. 26.6 31.9 23.2 25.5 21.9 38.3

3 to 5 years...... 20.1 33.8 10.4 21.4 22.5 14.5

6 or more years... 53.3 34.3 66.3 53.2 55.7 47.2

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980, Table 158

Of the 28,167 persons who lived in the U.S. for 6 or more consecutive months between 1970 and 1980, 15,517 (55 percent) were males (Table 7.17). Most were in the school and working ages of 15 to 34 years (60 percent). Except for the youngest group, most (55 percent) had lived away for 6 or more years.

Table 7.17. Males 5 Years and Over Who Lived in the United States

for 6 or more Consecutive Months Between 1970 and 1980

by Sex and Length of Last Stay in the U.S. by Age: 1980

Under 15 to 25 to 35 to 45

15 24 34 44 Years

Length of Stay Years Years Years Years Old and

in the U.S. Total Old Old Old Old Over

Males......... 15517 2793 4410 4973 2107 1234

Percent...... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

6 months to 2 yrs. 25.3 32.2 20.5 25.6 21.9 33.9

3 to 5 years...... 20.0 33.5 9.4 22.3 23.0 15.3

6 or more years... 54.7 34.3 70.2 52.1 55.0 50.8

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980, Table 158

The characteristics of females who lived away for 6 or more months were similar to those of the males who did the same (Table 7.18). Fully 58 percent were between 15 to 34 years; 52 percent had lived away 6 or more years.

Table 7.18. Females 5 Years and Over Who Lived in the United States

for 6 or more Consecutive Months Between 1970 and 1980

by Sex and Length of Last Stay in the U.S. by Age: 1980

Under 15 to 25 to 35 to 45

15 24 34 44 Years

Length of Stay Years Years Years Years Old and

in the U.S. Total Old Old Old Old Over

Females........ 12650 2741 3302 4030 1531 1046

Percent....... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

6 months to 2 yrs. 28.1 31.6 26.9 25.4 21.8 43.3

3 to 5 years...... 20.3 34.2 11.8 20.2 21.7 13.6

6 or more years... 51.6 34.2 61.3 54.4 56.5 43.2

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980, Table 158

Table 7.19 shows the activity of persons who lived in the U.S. for those 5 years old and over, and persons 16 years old and over. Of the 24,835 persons 5 years and over who reported their activity, 11,804 (48 percent) were females and 13,031 were males. Of those reporting an activity, 36 percent attended school or college (37 percent of males and 34 percent of females). Of the total persons 16 years old and over who reported their activity **** SOME PEOPLE ARE BOTH SEXES ***** (19, 599 or 88 percent), 10,454 (53 percent) were males and 12,108 were females. Slightly over 40 percent of males that reported an activity were working at a job or business and 68 percent were in the Armed Forces. For the females who reported an activity, 39 percent were in school and nearly 10 percent were in the Armed Forces.

Table 7.19. Activity for Last 6 Months of Residence for Persons Who

Lived in the U.S. between 1970 and 1980: 1980

Activity Total Males Females

Persons 5 years and over.. 28167 15517 12650

Attending school or college.... 8889 4839 4050

Not attending.................. 15946 8192 7754

Not reported................... 3332 2486 846

Percent of reported.......... 35.8 37.1 34.3

Persons 16 years and over. 22199 12512 9687

Working at a job or business... 7822 4220 3602

Not working.................... 11777 6234 5543

Not reported................... 2600 2058 542

Percent of reported.......... 39.9 40.4 39.4

In the armed forces............ 8728 7868 860

Not in armed forces............ 11740 3669 8071

Not reported................... 1731 975 756

Percent of reported.......... 42.6 68.2 9.6

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980,

Tables 154 and 156

SUMMARY

Slightly over 49 percent of the total population of the island in 1980 had been born on Guam; the remainder were migrants. When the military are discounted, however, nearly 60 percent of Guam's population were born on the island. The majority of the migrants came from the United States (45 percent) or Asia (also 45 percent). The most common period of immigration was 1979 to 1980 (30 percent), followed by 1977 to 1978 (24 percent), except for immigrants from the Philippines, who came most often between 1960 to 1969.

Immigrants were most likely to be between 20 and 64 years of age (67 percent), in the labor force (73 percent), and to have been born in the same place that their father had been born (80 percent) rather than their mother's birthplace (77 percent).

Persons who had lived away from Guam between 1970 and 1980 returned most often in the period between 1979 to 1980 (40 percent) or 1977 to 1978 (32 percent). For those who were 5 years or over, most had lived away from Guam for 6 or more years (53 percent). Many who had lived away from Guam were in the Armed Forces (43 percent), or school (36 percent).

When considering the age of immigrants, (20 to 64), their labor force participation (73 percent), and their birthplace (United States or Asia), the majority were military personnel or laborers who were on Guam to work, then return home. They had a short‑term, but vital, impact on the island, in the form of income earned, taxes paid, and money spent here, as well as participation in services and programs available on island. One issue that repeatedly arises, however, is whether or not migrants fill jobs that local personnel could fill. Only 55 percent of those who are 16 years and over and born on Guam were in the labor force. This aspect of migration will be explored in more depth in Chapter 10: Labor Force.

With the approval of the Commonwealth Act by Guam voters, including the provision to control local immigration, the migration picture is expected to change considerably. It is not foreseen, however, that this change will occur before the 1990 census. Any impact that a change in immigration policy will cause will have to wait until the census in 2000.

CHAPTER 8

ETHNICITY

"...Being a Guamanian can't be a blood thing, although I guess it would help to have some Chamorro blood in you. The only problem is that the Spanish wiped out most of the male Chamorros, so it is difficult to find any pure Chamorro blood...Maybe if we can't use blood, or birth as a standard for just what does constitute a Guamanian...maybe to be a Guamanian he has to like chicken and red rice. Or has to vote in a local election. Or maybe to be a real Guamanian a guy has to know the language. That's not bad, except that some people know it better than others, and language is a hard thing to measure...

Land ownership would have been a nice criterion to use some years ago, but unfortunately many Guamanians never have owned land, and other Guamanians have sold their land ‑ of their own free will ‑ to Japanese, Chinese, Koreans, or statesiders...

I have my own personal recommendation. I say that if a guy is sitting around with a bunch of unhappy sailors, discussing the island, if that guy stands up and says only nice things about Guam as a place to live, as his home, then he should be allowed to pass. If he talks about the fiestas, the balmy trade winds blowing off the sea, the coconut palms floating gently in the green hills between Agat and Umatac ‑ and pronounces Umatac correctly, then I would say that here we have a Guamanian." (Joe Murphy, Pipedreams, The Sunday News, March 24, 1974).

In Chapter 1 we traced the history of Chamorros, Filipinos, and others on Guam from Spanish times and into the 20th century. In this chapter we will be looking at the current social and economic situation of the various ethnic groups on Guam, but will be spending most of the time looking at the major groups ‑ Chamorros, Filipinos, and others (including Whites).

The data on ethnicity were derived from the answers to question 4. The 1980 census marked the first time that a general question on ethnicity was asked in a decennial census. The question was based on self‑identification and was open‑ended (respondents were required to provide the answer).

Ethnicity refers to a person's nationality group, lineage, or the country in which the person or the person's parents or ancestors were born before their arrival on Guam. Thus, persons reported their ethnic group regardless of the number of generations removed from their country of origin. Furthermore, responses to the ethnicity question reflected the ethnic group(s) with which persons identified and not necessarily the degree of attachment or association the persons had with the particular group(s).

Ethnicity is different from other population characteristics that are sometimes regarded as indicators of ethnicity, namely country of birth and language spoken at home.

A large number of persons reported their ethnicity by specifying a single ethnic group, but some reported two, three, or more ethnic groups. All responses were coded manually by a procedure that allowed for identification of all single ethnic groups reported. In addition, selected two‑ and three‑part combinations of ethnicity were identified by unique codes (these categories were selected since they were reported frequently in Census Bureau surveys taken prior to the 1980 census). All other multiple responses were coded according to the first ethnic category reported.

In published tabulations, multiple groups are designated in open‑ended categories such as "Chamorro and other groups," rather than in specific multiple ethnic groups such as "Chamorro‑Carolinian." A person who reported "Chamorro‑Carolinian" ethnicity, for example, is included in the "Chamorro and other groups" and in the category "Carolinian and other groups." A few responses consisting of two terms (e.g. French Canadian) were considered as a single group and were coded and tabulated as a single ethnicity. In addition, persons reporting combinations of ethnic groups such as "German‑Bavarian" were tabulated as a single group (i.e., German). Responses such as "Polish‑American" or "Italian‑American" were coded and tabulated as a single entry (i.e., "Polish" or "Italian"). A sole entry of "American" was tabulated in the category "Ethnicity not specified." Entries of religious groups were not coded separately and were tabulated in the category "Ethnic group not specified."

ETHNICITY CHARACTERISTICS

In 1980 Chamorros continued to be the largest ethnic group on Guam, although their proportion of the total population was the smallest of any of the decennial censuses in this century (Table 8.1 and Figure 8.1). From 92 percent in the 1920 census, the proportion of Chamorros remained high until the outbreak of World War II (89 percent in 1930 and 90 percent in 1940); subsequently, the percentage of the population that was Chamorro decreased drastically as large numbers of military persons immigrated in the 1940s, and many Filipinos immigrated in the 1960s and 1970s, particularly after the change in the immigration laws in 1965.

Table 8.1. Ethnicity: 1920 to 1980

Ethnicity and

Birthplace 1980 1960 1950 1940 1930 1920

Total..... 105,979 67,044 59,498 22,290 18,509 13,275

Chamorros...... 47,825 34,762 27,124 20,177 16,402 12,216

Filipinos...... 22,447 8,580 7,258 569 365 396

Whites......... 26,901 20,724 22,920 785 1,205 280

Others......... 8,806 2,978 2,196 759 537 383

Total..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Chamorros...... 45.1 51.8 45.6 90.5 88.6 92.0

Filipinos...... 21.2 12.8 12.2 2.6 2.0 3.0

Whites......... 25.4 30.9 38.5 3.5 6.5 2.1

Others......... 8.3 4.4 3.7 3.4 2.9 2.9

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

In 1950, Chamorros constituted only 46 percent of the population (half the percentage of only 10 years earlier ‑ although numbers increased by about 7,000). On the other hand, Whites increased from 4 percent of the population in 1940 to 39 percent in 1950 and Filipinos increased from 3 percent to 12 percent during the period. The percentage of persons of other ethnicities remained low throughout the period.

By 1960, more than half the population was again Chamorro, but this gain was as much due to departing military personnel before the 1960 census as to gains in the Chamorro population itself. Although the Chamorro population increased by 6 percentage points, this was more than offset by the 8 percentage point decreases for Whites.

No ethnic data were tabulated in 1970, breaking the string of census data on ethnicity. Unfortunately, the 1980 Census data are also rather ambiguous. As noted in the definitions section, respondents could give any number of ethnicities, with the first two being coded. Therefore, some persons responded with a single ancestry response and others with more than one response. Since many people gave two or more responses, the sum of the responses was greater than the number of persons, which complicated the analysis of the data. Also, although the Census Bureau provided coded for Chamorro, Guamanian, Filipino, and other Asian and Pacific Islander groups, there was no acceptable code for "White" which has made analysis very difficult, and all of the analysis here should be treated as little more than tentative.

In the analysis here, we have used a convention for Whites: all persons who reported as European (or one of the European groups) either alone or in combination with other groups were included, as were persons who gave other single ancestry responses not coded in one of the Asian or Pacific Islander groups, and persons who did not respond. This convention assumes that Asian and Pacific Islander persons would respond to the question and would respond with an appropriate Asian or Pacific Islander response. Hence, their responses should not appear in either the "other single" response category

since they would have been coded into the proper Asian or Pacific Islander category, and they would not appear in the categories "Not Reported" and "Not Specified" since normally they would have responded. This definition of "White", therefore, includes all "Blacks" and any "Hispanics" who did not choose one of the European categories for ethnic response. It is also important to note that persons of Chamorro and "White" ancestry (941 altogether) are included in both groups. By this definition, "White" became the second largest group in 1980 at 25 percent.

In 1980, Filipinos remained the third ranking group with 22,447 persons identified by single ethnicity (21 percent of the total population). Filipinos increased by 8 percentage points during the 20 year period since the last time ethnic data were collected in a decennial census on Guam. This increase was mostly at the expense of Whites (who decreased by 5 percent during the period and Chamorros (who decreased by 6 percent). On the other hand, the percentage of "Other races" almost doubled during the period, growing from 4 percent to more than 8 percent; most of these persons were other Asian immigrants and Micronesians from the other islands in the areas (including some Carolinians from the Northern Mariana Islands.)

Figure 8.1 Ethnicity: 1920 to 1980

(Percent)

Table 8.2 shows the percentage change for the largest ethnic groups between adjacent censuses. Only Chamorros have shown fairly consistent increases in population during the period (although the last period was 20 years compared to 10 years for the other periods.) Chamorros increased by between 23 and 28 percent between adjacent censuses during the century.

Whites increased by more than 300 percent between 1920 and 1930, but the absolute numbers were rather small. Between 1930 and 1940 the percentage of Whites decreased by about one‑third, and then leaped by more than 2000 percent during the next decade because of the military occupation and building of armed forces establishments on the island in the latter part of the 1940s. As the military build‑up wound down in the late 1960s, Whites left the island, so that the 1960 census showed about a 10 percent decrease from 1950. During the 20 years preceding the 1980 census, the population began to increase again.

Filipinos also showed huge increases and decreases. Although the number of Filipinos decreased somewhat between 1920 and 1930, there was more than a 50 percent increase during the next decade. Between 1940 and 1950 the Filipino population increased by more than 1000 percent, partly as a result of Filipinos in the military, and partly, probably due to persons leaving the Philippines about the time of Philippine independence in 1944.

Filipinos continued to increase modestly between 1950 and 1960, but after 1960, Filipino growth was the largest of any of the major groups, growing more than 100 percent during the 20 year period, partly because of the change in the U.S. immigration laws allowing more Filipinos to come to the U.S., and, therefore, to Guam as well.

Table 8.2. Change in Ethnicity: 1920 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1960 to 1950 to 1940 to 1930 to 1920 to

Ethnicity 1980 1960 1950 1940 1930

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total...... 58.1 12.7 166.9 20.4 39.4

Chamorros...... 37.6 28.2 34.4 23.0 34.3

Filipinos...... 161.6 18.2 1175.6 55.9 ‑7.8

Whites......... 29.8 ‑9.6 2819.7 ‑34.9 330.4

_________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

PLACE OF BIRTH

By 1980, almost 3 out of every 10 persons on Guam were foreign born (see also Chapter 7 on migration.) The proportion of foreign born (those not born in the United States, Guam, or one of the U.S. territories) almost doubled between 1970 and 1980, although it had remained pretty constant between 1950 and 1950 and 1970. Data for Filipinos and for Guam's population as a whole before 1950 are not comparable with the later data because persons born in the Philippines were considered native from 1898 at the end of the Spanish‑American war until Philippines independence in 1944. So, for the earlier censuses it is not possible to tell what percentage of

the "natives" were born in the Philippines; these persons are listed as foreign born in 1950 and after (Table 8.3 and Figure 8.2).

The proportion of foreign born Chamorros has remained small, but has been increasing in recent years, and, in fact, almost doubled between 1960 and 1980, increasing from about 3 percent of the Chamorro population in 1960 to more than 5 percent in 1980. It is not clear what proportion of these Chamorros are part‑Chamorro, and how that would affect reporting for ethnicity and birthplace.

The foreign‑born White population increased significantly between 1960 and 1980, the percentage being more than 4 times as large in 1980 as in 1960, but much of this increase is probably due to the redefinition of "White" in 1980. It will be necessary to look at the 1990 census results which will allow for self‑identification of "Whites" to see whether this is a real trend.

The proportion of foreign‑born Filipinos has been decreasing since 1950, the first decennial census to include Philippines as foreign born. The percentage of foreign‑born Filipinos decreased from 94 percent in 1950 to 83 percent in 1960 and 77 percent in 1980. As Filipinos have children on Guam and their children have children, the proportion of native born should increase (unless there is further massive immigration of Filipinos from the Philippines.)

Figure 8.2 Percent Foreign Born: 1920 to 1980

Table 8.3. Ethnicity by Birthplace: 1920 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Ethnicity and

Birthplace 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1930 1920

Total.....105,979 84,996 67,044 59,498 22,290 18,509 13,275

Native....... 75,063 71,512 57,345 51,459 22,114 18,300 13,113

Foreign born. 30,916 13,484 9,699 8,039 176 209 162

Percent.... 29.2 15.9 14.5 13.5 .8 1.1 1.2

Chamorros...... 47,825 (NA) 34,762 27,124 20,177 16,402 12,216

Native....... 45,173 (NA) 33,769 26,521 20,089 16,319 12,187

Foreign born. 2,652 (NA) 993 603 88 83 29

Percent... 5.5 (NA) 2.9 2.2 .4 .5 .2

Filipinos...... 22,447 (NA) 8,580 7,258 569 365 396

Native....... 5,249 (NA) 1,489 403 568 364 394

Foreign born. 17,198 (NA) 7,091 6,855 1 1 2

Percent.... 76.6 (NA) 82.6 94.4 .2 .3 .5

Whites......... 26,901 (NA) 20,724 22,920 785 1,205 280

Native....... 22,204 (NA) 19,856 22,560 740 1,139 236

Foreign born. 4,697 (NA) 868 360 45 66 44

Percent.... 17.5 (NA) 4.2 1.6 5.7 5.5 15.7

______________________________________________________________________

Notes: People Born in Philippines considered native until 1944; Whites

in 1980 were combinations of ethnic groups not comparable.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

The changes between adjacent censuses highlight the affects of the foreign born population on Guam. During the early decades of the century, between 1920 and 1940, the increase in the native population was faster than the foreign born sector (with the foreign‑born actually showing a decrease between 1930 and 1940.)

The data for foreign‑born Chamorros are probably suspect, and the numbers are rather small in any case. Foreign‑born whites showed the same rollercoaster pattern of Whites in general, with native born Whites increasing more rapidly between 1920 and 1930, then both experienced about a one‑third decline during the next decade, native born whites in the military increasing more rapidly than foreign born during the big migration. (Although the foreign born increase of 700 percent is impressive, the relative numbers were small). Between 1950 and 1960 the native born White population actually decreased by more than 10 percent while the foreign‑born Whites continued to increase, more than doubling during the decade. And again, although the numbers for 1980 are suspect, the increase of foreign‑born between 1960 and 1980 was considerable.

Table 8.4. Change in Ethnicity by Birthplace: 1920 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Ethnicity and 1970 to 1960 to 1950 to 1940 to 1930 to 1920 to

Birthplace 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1930

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total..... 24.7 26.8 12.7 166.9 20.4 39.4

Native....... 5.0 24.7 11.4 132.7 20.8 39.6

Foreign born. 129.3 39.0 20.6 4467.6 ‑15.8 29.0

Chamorros...... 37.6 NA 28.2 34.4 23.0 34.3

Native....... 33.8 NA 27.3 32.0 23.1 33.9

Foreign born. 167.1 NA 64.7 585.2 6.0 186.2

Filipinos...... 161.6 NA 18.2 1175.6 56.0 ‑7.8

Native....... 252.5 NA 269.5 ... ... ...

Foreign born. 142.5 NA 3.4 ... ... ...

Whites......... 29.8 NA ‑9.6 2819.7 ‑34.9 330.4

Native....... 11.8 NA ‑12.0 2948.6 ‑35.0 382.6

Foreign born. 441.1 NA 141.1 700.0 ‑31.8 50.0

_______________________________________________________________

Note: The figures in the 1970‑1980 column for the ethnic groups represent

the change between 1960 and 1980 since ethnic data were not collected

in the 1970 census.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

In 1980, Chamorros still maintained the dominance experienced since the beginning of the century. Of the 105,979 persons, 44,299 or 42 percent reported single Chamorro ethnicity, that is Chamorro and no other ethnicity (Table 8.5). Another 3,546 (3 percent) reported Chamorro in combination with other ethnicity responses. A final 1 percent reported "Guamanian", a difficult group to deal with since it is not known whether these are latter‑day Chamorros who feel a kind of separation from older Chamorros or these are persons of other races or ethnic groups who have chosen Guamanian ethnicity because of birthplace or affiliation.

Once again, the second largest ethnic group was Filipino (21 percent). No other major group had as much as 10 percent of the population. There were almost 2,000 Japanese and about an equal number of Koreans, defined by single ancestry. About 1,300 Palauans identified themselves on the basis of ethnicity.

More than 3 of every 4 persons born on Guam in 1980 were Chamorro single ancestry, and another 6 percent were part‑Chamorro. Almost 9 percent of all persons born on Guam and living on the island in 1980 were Filipino. On the other hand, more than 4 in every 10 persons born off island were Asian, with 1 in 3 of all off‑islanders being Filipino. That is, one‑third of all the persons living on Guam in 1980 but not born on the island were Filipinos. About 1 in 7 were "European".

The final column in Table 8.5 shows the percentage of persons in each of the ethnic groups who were born on Guam. Only 49 percent of Guam's population was born on island. As would be expected, more than 9 of every

10 Chamorros were born on Guam, with most of the rest presumably born in the Northern Mariana Islands. More than 8 in 10 of the Guamanians were born on island as were more than 3 out of every 4 persons claiming multiple ethnic responses.

On the other hand, only 18 percent of the Asians were born on Guam, 1 in 5 of the Filipinos, 1 of every 10 Japanese, and 1 of every 14 Koreans. Europeans constituted 8 percent of those born on Guam.

Table 8.5. Ethnicity by Birthplace: 1980

Numbers Percent Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Guam

Guam Not Guam Not of

Ethnicity Total Born Guam Total Born Guam Total

Total persons.........105,979 52,113 53,866 100.0 100.0 100.0 49.2

Single Ethnic group...... 94,839 48,332 46,507 89.5 92.7 86.3 51.0

Chamorro............... 44,299 40,461 3,838 41.8 77.6 7.1 91.3

Guamanian.............. 830 694 136 .8 1.3 .3 83.6

Palauan................ 1,335 480 855 1.3 .9 1.6 36.0

Other Pacific Islander. 891 210 681 .8 .4 1.3 23.6

Asian.................. 28,647 5,099 23,548 27.0 9.8 43.7 17.8

Filipino............. 22,447 4,519 17,928 21.2 8.7 33.3 20.1

Japanese............. 1,855 197 1,658 1.8 .4 3.1 10.6

Korean............... 1,873 126 1,747 1.8 .2 3.2 6.7

European............... 8,442 629 7,813 8.0 1.2 14.5 7.5

Other single group..... 10,395 759 9,636 9.8 1.5 17.9 7.3

Multiple ethnic group.... 3,990 3,105 885 3.8 6.0 1.6 77.8

Chamorro and other..... 3,546 3,036 510 3.3 5.8 .9 85.6

Asian and other........ 2,963 2,643 320 2.8 5.1 .6 89.2

European and other..... 914 392 522 .9 .8 1.0 42.9

Not spec./Not reported... 7,150 676 6,474 6.7 1.3 12.0 9.5

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 26.

MEDIAN AGE

Again, because of migration, the median age of the various population components has not shown the kinds of general trends expected in modernizing populations. The median age of the population increased between 1930 and 1950, then decreased to 1960, and then increased again to 1980, partly as a result of the influx of relatively older Filipino migrants and reduced fertility of Chamorro women (Table 8.6 and Figure 8.3).

The Chamorro population, as it has in many areas, shows a fairly typical pattern of an economically developing population. The median age decreased fairly steadily from 1930 to 1960, and then suddenly increased between 1960 and 1980. As was discussed in the fertility chapter, the decrease in median age was almost certainly due to decreasing mortality, and the subsequent increase in fertility, followed in the 1960s and 1970s by delay of marriage and child bearing.

Because of the large numbers of immigrants, neither the Filipinos nor the Whites show this pattern. Among the Filipinos, for example, the median age started out lower than for Chamorros in 1930 and 1940, but as immigration increased, so did the median age, rising to 33.3 in 1960 (but still being offset by the very low median age of Chamorros, in what might be called a Renaissance of Chamorro fertility.) The median age of the White population has fluctuated quite a bit, depending on military activity.

Table 8.6. Median Age of Ethnic Groups: 1930 to 1980

Age Group 1980 1960 1950 1940 1930

Total........ 22.3 20.8 22.8 17.9 18.8

Chamorro........ 18.2 14.4 16.6 17.5 18.1

Filipino........ 27.9 33.6 27.2 15.0 17.8

White........... 23.5 22.7 24.1 27.4 24.6

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

Figure 8.3 Median Age by Ethnic Group: 1940 to 1980

The young age of the Chamorro is seen in the distribution by age group (Table 8.7). The percentage of the population under 5 increased from 18 percent in 1930 to 21 percent in 1950 before decreasing to only 13 percent in 1980, a decrease of one‑third during the 30 years. The very low median age for 1960 is seen in the young ages for that census, and the gradual aging of the population in 1980. The percentage of aged remains low.

Table 8.7. Chamorros by Age: 1930 to 1980

Age Group 1980 1960 1950 1940 1930

Total......... 47,845 34,762 27,124 20,177 16,402

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs. 13.2 18.9 20.6 17.0 18.0

5 to 9 yrs...... 14.3 17.4 12.6 14.9 13.7

10 to 14 yrs.... 14.1 15.4 13.3 12.9 12.1

15 to 19 yrs.... 13.2 8.9 11.0 10.2 10.2

20 to 24 yrs.... 8.3 6.8 8.6 7.8 8.6

25 to 29 yrs.... 7.4 5.6 6.5 7.4 7.5

30 to 34 yrs.... 6.2 5.6 5.6 6.2 6.1

35 to 44 yrs.... 8.3 8.3 9.3 9.5 9.7

45 to 54 yrs.... 7.1 6.3 6.0 6.5 6.5

55 to 64 yrs.... 4.3 3.9 3.7 4.3 4.9

65 yrs or more.. 3.6 2.8 2.7 3.1 2.7

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

The change between adjacent censuses is also revealing (Table 8.8). The number of persons 0 to 4 years old decreased by more than 4 percent between 1960 and 1980, the only age group for Chamorros to decrease during the half century. On the other hand, the population 15 to 19 more than doubled, probably because of the double affects of the baby boom, and the smaller than average group of 15 to 19 year olds in 1960. The persons who would have been 15 to 19 in 1960 would have been born between 1941 and 1945, during the period of the Japanese occupation when fertility was unnaturally low because of the conditions on the island. This phenomenon is seen in the very small increase in the 15 to 19 year olds between 1950 and 1960, and the even smaller increase for persons 20 to 24 in between 1950 and 1960.

Table 8.8. Change in Chamorro Population by Age: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1960 to 1950 to 1940 to 1930 to

Age Group 1980 1960 1950 1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total......... 37.6 28.2 34.4 23.0

Less than 5 yrs. ‑4.1 17.6 62.8 16.6

5 to 9 yrs...... 12.6 77.6 13.6 33.4

10 to 14 yrs.... 26.7 47.7 38.5 31.6

15 to 19 yrs.... 103.4 4.0 44.9 23.6

20 to 24 yrs.... 68.1 1.1 47.5 12.3

25 to 29 yrs.... 80.6 10.5 18.7 20.1

30 to 34 yrs.... 53.4 27.2 21.4 25.4

35 to 44 yrs.... 36.9 14.6 31.3 21.1

45 to 54 yrs.... 54.7 34.6 24.5 22.2

55 to 64 yrs.... 51.8 36.2 15.7 7.1

65 yrs or more.. 78.8 32.1 16.7 43.5

______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

The change in the distribution of the Filipino population shows the affects of migration (Table 8.9). Although the Filipino populations in 1930 and 1940 were very small, they showed fairly regular distributions. By 1950, more than half of the Filipino population was between 20 and 29 years old, and this bulge continued through the 1960 and 1980 censuses, although other immigrants came during the later periods as well.

Table 8.9. Filipinos by Age: 1930 to 1980

Age Group 1980 1960 1950 1940 1930

Total......... 22,447 8,580 7,258 569 365

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs. 11.0 8.7 2.6 19.2 17.5

5 to 9 yrs...... 10.4 6.2 .7 15.3 16.4

10 to 14 yrs.... 9.0 2.5 .5 15.6 10.7

15 to 19 yrs.... 7.8 .9 1.8 10.0 9.6

20 to 24 yrs.... 6.4 1.4 33.2 6.9 9.9

25 to 29 yrs.... 9.3 10.5 25.5 4.9 8.5

30 to 34 yrs.... 9.4 27.3 12.8 5.4 6.3

35 to 44 yrs.... 12.8 28.4 17.2 9.8 9.6

45 to 54 yrs.... 12.1 12.3 4.9 5.4 4.1

55 to 64 yrs.... 8.1 1.4 .6 4.4 3.0

65 yrs or more.. 3.8 .3 .1 3.0 4.4

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

Between 1930 and 1940, Filipinos increased by 56 percent, and then by 1176 percent during the next decade because of the relatively large immigration after the war (and Philippines' independence.) The median age for Filipinos decreased between 1930 and 1940, mostly due to fertility, although there may also have been some emigration during the decade. The

largest increase was in the 20 to 44 year age groups. However, in 1950 a clear indication of the heavy immigration was seen in the 20 to 54 year old ages. Most of this increase was due to alien laborers imported for construction work with the military where massive construction activities took place, and the rebuilding of Guam's civilian infrastructure from the destruction caused by World War II.

Between 1950 and 1960, the number of Filipinos increased by 18 percent. While the proportion of children increased, the working age group 20 to 29 years old decreased by 126 percent. On the other hand, the age group 30 to 34 increased by 442 percent, again because of selective immigration. Because of the labor shortage hampering Guam's growth, the Filipinos moved into the labor force as the need for more construction workers developed. In late 1962, another disaster struck Guam in the form of Typhoon Karen, devastating about 90 percent of its homes; more Filipinos came then in order to build houses and other structures.

The Filipino population, the third ranking group in 1980, more than doubled between 1960 and 1980, and comprising 21 percent of the population in 1980. Another typhoon, this time named Pamela, hit the island in 1976, eliminating almost every wooden structure on the island, and causing renewed immigration of Filipinos.

Table 8.10. Change in the Filipino Population by Age: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1960 to 1950 to 1940 to 1930 to

Age Group 1980 1960 1950 1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total......... 161.6 18.2 1175.6 55.9

Less than 5 yrs. 231.9 290.6 75.2 70.3

5 to 9 yrs...... 339.7 983.7 ‑43.7 45.0

10 to 14 yrs.... 832.7 456.4 ‑56.2 128.2

15 to 19 yrs.... 2077.5 ‑39.4 131.6 62.9

20 to 24 yrs.... 1050.0 ‑94.8 6071.8 8.3

25 to 29 yrs.... 131.0 ‑51.2 6514.3 ‑9.7

30 to 34 yrs.... ‑10.2 151.7 2900.0 34.8

35 to 44 yrs.... 17.6 95.0 2132.1 60.0

45 to 54 yrs.... 157.4 195.0 1054.8 106.7

55 to 64 yrs.... 1426.9 197.5 60.0 127.3

65 yrs or more.. 3316.0 150.0 ‑41.2 6.2

______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

The second largest ethnic group was the Whites (Table 8.11). In 1940, Whites (785 persons) had decreased 35 percent from the 1,205 persons in 1930. After the Liberation of Guam on July 21, 1944, an influx of military personnel with their dependents greatly increased the count of Whites; in 1950 where this group comprised almost 38 percent of the total population, an increase of 3820 percent since 1940.

Table 8.11. Whites by Age: 1930 to 1980

Age Group 1980 1960 1950 1940 1930

Total......... 26,901 20,724 22,920 785 1,205

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs. 12.3 14.6 7.3 7.4 4.7

5 to 9 yrs...... 9.6 10.8 4.0 5.2 4.5

10 to 14 yrs.... 6.7 7.3 1.6 2.5 1.9

15 to 19 yrs.... 8.3 7.7 15.9 4.2 13.3

20 to 24 yrs.... 18.5 18.3 26.0 21.4 28.0

25 to 29 yrs.... 13.7 11.2 14.3 19.0 17.9

30 to 34 yrs.... 11.7 9.7 11.9 15.9 11.8

35 to 44 yrs.... 11.3 13.6 12.4 15.8 11.4

45 to 54 yrs.... 4.4 4.8 5.3 4.7 4.6

55 to 64 yrs.... 2.4 1.7 1.1 2.7 1.4

65 yrs or more.. 1.0 .4 .2 1.1 .5

_________________________________________________________________________

Note: Whites in 1980 derived by adding European single and multiple

ethnicity, other single ethnicity, and not reported.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

The most significant change was in the age group 15‑19 years which increased 10,970 percent (Table 8.12) from 1940 to 1950. By 1960, the same age group (15‑19) decreased by 57 percent. While uniformed personnel declined by 10 percent, an increase of the younger ages occurred, an indication that immigration of military dependents took place. By 1980, this category increased 30 percent (26,901 persons) making up 25 percent of the total population (105,979).

Table 8.12. Change in the White Population by Age: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1960 to 1950 to 1940 to 1930 to

Age Group 1980 1960 1950 1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total......... 29.8 ‑9.6 2819.7 ‑34.9

Less than 5 yrs. 9.7 80.0 2793.1 1.8

5 to 9 yrs...... 15.9 145.8 2122.0 ‑24.1

10 to 14 yrs.... 20.3 309.5 1735.0 ‑13.0

15 to 19 yrs.... 40.9 ‑56.5 10969.7 ‑79.4

20 to 24 yrs.... 31.1 ‑36.3 3444.0 ‑50.1

25 to 29 yrs.... 59.1 ‑29.5 2106.7 ‑31.0

30 to 34 yrs.... 56.0 ‑26.2 2076.8 ‑12.0

35 to 44 yrs.... 7.3 ‑.7 2196.8 ‑9.5

45 to 54 yrs.... 20.5 ‑18.8 3191.9 ‑33.9

55 to 64 yrs.... 77.6 47.2 1071.4 23.5

65 yrs or more.. 284.9 102.8 300.0 50.0

______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

CHARACTERISTICS OF ETHNIC GROUPS

Although ethnicity was not one of the major variables used in the cross‑tabulations for the 1980 census (in PC80‑1‑C/D54), most of the major variables were cross‑tabulated with ethnicity, so a picture of the ethnic make‑up of the population in 1980 can be determined.

The major ethnic group, Chamorro, was divided into full‑ and part‑Chamorro for the census tabulations, with full‑Chamorro being persons who stated that they were only of Chamorro ancestry and part‑Chamorros declaring Chamorro and other ancestries. Almost 48,000 persons claimed either full‑ or part‑Chamorro ancestry. The single and multiple designations were not considered for Filipino since the multiple could not be disaggregated from all Asian multiples; only Filipinos with single ancestry reports were used. The procedures described previously for defining Whites were used in the cross‑tabs presented here.

As noted in Table 8.8, the median age for the population on Guam in 1980 was 22.3 years. The Chamorro median age was 18.2, Filipino median age was 27.9, and the median for Whites was 23.5. The median age for full‑Chamorros of 18.9 years was somewhat higher than the 12.5 years for part‑Chamorros. This phenomenon of younger aged multiples has been discussed for United States populations previously (Levin and Farley, 1982), and is caused by the fact that multiples can occur either as the offspring of two singles or from a single and a multiple, or from two multiples, whereas a single ancestry response should normally come only as the offspring of identical single reports. Since the universe for singles is more restricted, they tend to be older.

Almost 60 percent of the part‑Chamorros were under 15 years old compared to only 40 percent of the full‑Chamorros (Table 8.13). In this table Whites were defined as those of single and multiple European ancestry and "other" single ancestry. The largest percentages of Whites were between 20 and 44 years old, while Chamorros were focussed in the younger ages, and Filipinos were older with 1 in 4 being between 35 and 54 years old.

Table 8.13. Ethnicity by Age: 1980

Chamorro Not

All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Fili‑ Specif. All

Age Group Persons Total Full Part pino White or NR Others

Total......... 105,979 47,845 44,299 3,546 22,447 19,751 7,150 8,786

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs. 12.3 13.2 12.7 19.8 11.0 12.9 10.8 10.3

5 to 9 yrs...... 11.9 14.3 13.8 19.8 10.4 9.7 9.4 10.0

10 to 14 yrs.... 10.7 14.1 13.6 20.5 9.0 6.5 7.2 8.4

15 to 19 yrs.... 10.4 13.2 12.7 19.8 7.8 7.9 9.4 8.0

20 to 24 yrs.... 10.5 8.3 8.2 8.7 6.4 18.4 18.7 8.5

25 to 29 yrs.... 9.7 7.4 7.5 5.6 9.3 14.2 12.4 11.6

30 to 34 yrs.... 8.8 6.2 6.6 1.7 9.4 11.8 11.1 12.2

35 to 44 yrs.... 10.7 8.3 8.8 1.3 12.8 11.2 11.6 16.4

45 to 54 yrs.... 7.7 7.1 7.6 1.2 12.1 4.2 5.1 9.8

55 to 59 yrs.... 2.7 2.4 2.6 .6 5.2 1.4 1.5 2.3

60 to 64 yrs.... 1.8 1.9 2.0 .6 2.9 .8 1.2 1.4

65 yrs or more.. 2.8 3.6 3.9 .5 3.8 .9 1.6 1.2

Median 22.3 18.2 18.9 12.5 27.9 23.5 21.5 27.9

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

Table 8.14 shows the distribution for each of the 5 year age groups. Although Chamorros made up 45 percent of Guam's total population in 1980, they were 60 percent of the 10 to 14 year olds and 57 percent of the 15 to 19 year olds. Their numbers generally decreased for the older ages, but they were 58 percent of the persons 65 years and over.

Chamorros were less than 1 in every 3 of the persons 30 to 34 years old. In this age group, more than 1 in 5 were Filipino, and 1 in 4 were "White". More than 1 in 3 of all persons on Guam between 35 and 64 years old were Filipino in 1980.

Table 8.14. Percent Ethnicity by Age: 1980

Chamorro Not

All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Fili‑ Specif. All

Age Group Persons Total Full Part pino White or NR Others

Total......... 100.0 45.1 41.8 3.3 21.2 18.6 6.7 8.3

Less than 5 yrs. 100.0 48.5 43.1 5.4 19.0 19.6 5.9 7.0

5 to 9 yrs...... 100.0 54.0 48.5 5.6 18.5 15.2 5.3 6.9

10 to 14 yrs.... 100.0 59.7 53.3 6.4 17.9 11.4 4.6 6.5

15 to 19 yrs.... 100.0 57.4 51.0 6.4 15.8 14.3 6.1 6.4

20 to 24 yrs.... 100.0 35.6 32.8 2.8 12.8 32.8 12.0 6.8

25 to 29 yrs.... 100.0 34.1 32.2 1.9 20.2 27.1 8.6 9.9

30 to 34 yrs.... 100.0 32.1 31.4 .7 22.6 25.2 8.6 11.5

35 to 44 yrs.... 100.0 35.1 34.7 .4 25.4 19.5 7.3 12.7

45 to 54 yrs.... 100.0 41.7 41.1 .5 33.3 10.1 4.5 10.5

55 to 59 yrs.... 100.0 39.9 39.2 .7 39.9 9.5 3.8 6.9

60 to 64 yrs.... 100.0 46.6 45.6 1.0 33.9 8.7 4.6 6.3

65 yrs or more.. 100.0 58.5 57.9 .5 28.6 5.7 3.7 3.5

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

Table 8.15 summarizes information from several of the previous tables. Again, while Chamorros displayed the characteristics of a fairly normal age distribution, with a gradual tapering off with age, because of the immigrant nature of the Filipinos and Whites, their age structures differed considerably from a "normal" distribution.

Table 8.15. Ethnicity by Age for Major Ethnic Groups: 1980

All All

Age Group Persons Chamorro Filipino White Others

Total......... 105,979 47,845 22,447 26,901 8,786

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs. 12.3 13.2 11.0 12.3 10.3

5 to 9 yrs...... 11.9 14.3 10.4 9.6 10.0

10 to 14 yrs.... 10.7 14.1 9.0 6.7 8.4

15 to 19 yrs.... 10.4 13.2 7.8 8.3 8.0

20 to 24 yrs.... 10.5 8.3 6.4 18.5 8.5

25 to 29 yrs.... 9.7 7.4 9.3 13.7 11.6

30 to 34 yrs.... 8.8 6.2 9.4 11.7 12.2

35 to 44 yrs.... 10.7 8.3 12.8 11.3 16.4

45 to 54 yrs.... 7.7 7.1 12.1 4.4 9.8

55 to 59 yrs.... 2.7 2.4 5.2 1.4 2.3

60 to 64 yrs.... 1.8 1.9 2.9 .9 1.4

65 yrs or more.. 2.8 3.6 3.8 1.0 1.2

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

Also, when focussing on the distribution of the three large ethnic groups, the impact of migration is clearly seen. Whites made up 45 percent

of the persons 20 to 24 in 1980, mostly because of the large number of persons of that age in the military (Table 8.16).

Table 8.16. Percent Ethnicity by Age for Major Ethnic Groups: 1980

All All

Age Group Persons Chamorro Filipino White Others

Total......... 100.0 45.1 21.2 25.4 8.3

Less than 5 yrs. 100.0 48.5 19.0 25.5 7.0

5 to 9 yrs...... 100.0 54.0 18.5 20.5 6.9

10 to 14 yrs.... 100.0 59.7 17.9 15.9 6.5

15 to 19 yrs.... 100.0 57.4 15.8 20.3 6.4

20 to 24 yrs.... 100.0 35.6 12.8 44.8 6.8

25 to 29 yrs.... 100.0 34.1 20.2 35.7 9.9

30 to 34 yrs.... 100.0 32.1 22.6 33.7 11.5

35 to 44 yrs.... 100.0 35.1 25.4 26.9 12.7

45 to 54 yrs.... 100.0 41.7 33.3 14.6 10.5

55 to 59 yrs.... 100.0 39.9 39.9 13.3 6.9

60 to 64 yrs.... 100.0 46.6 33.9 13.2 6.3

65 yrs or more.. 100.0 58.5 28.6 9.4 3.5

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21

LABOR FORCE PARTICIPATION

Because we will not be discussing labor force participation until Chapter 10, a few conventions are presented here. The economically active population comprised all persons 16 years and over of both sexes who furnished the supply of labor available for the production of economic goods and services, and included both persons employed and unemployed during the reference period. The employed comprised all persons, including family workers who were at work or who had jobs during the specified period, whether they were full‑time or part‑time workers. The unemployed consisted of all persons 16 years and over who were not working and were not seeking work for pay or profit during the reference period, including those who never worked before. The total economically active population was the sum of the civilian economically active population and the armed forces. However, members of the Armed Forces were separated from the economically active population. Secondly, the group not economically active population comprised home‑workers, students, persons in institutions, income‑recipients, and all other persons not included in the economically active population.

While almost 2 out of every 3 adults 16 years and over on Guam were in the labor force (including military personnel), only 55 percent of the Chamorros were in this category (with about the same proportions of full‑ and part‑Chamorros.) On the other hand, more than 7 in every 10 Filipinos were in the labor force, as were more than 8 in 10 of the Whites (again, as defined earlier in the broadest sense) (Table 8.17).

Part of the smaller proportions of Chamorros in the labor force can be attributed to fewer of them being in the Armed Forces. Since many Whites

and Filipinos came to Guam specifically to be in the Armed Forces, they appear in both the numerator and the denominator compared to many Chamorros who were here, and did not choose the join the military. Only 247 (2 percent) Chamorros were in the labor force and were in the military compared to 8 percent for Filipinos and 59 percent for Whites. [Still, the proportion of Chamorros in the labor force is somewhat below that of the other named groups.]

Also, Chamorros were somewhat less likely to work part‑time than Whites, but slightly more likely than Filipinos to be in this category. About 14 percent of the employed population on Guam worked part‑time; about 13 percent of the Chamorros were in this category, compared to 12 percent of the Filipinos, and almost 18 percent of the Whites.

All other ethnic groups, comprised of Koreans, Japanese, Chinese, Palauans, and other Asian and Pacific Islanders, constituted 9 percent of the total population 16 years and over. About 63 percent of these groups were in the labor force, and about 2 percent were in the Armed Forces. These groups made up about 11 percent of those employed in 1980, and about 8 percent of the unemployed.

As noted in Chapter 10 on labor force participation, using census data to analyze unemployment is rather problematic since the data are only at one particular point in time and are very susceptible to variabilities in economic conditions at the time of the census. Labor force surveys are more appropriate mechanisms for obtaining unemployment information, partly because they are more timely, and partly because unemployment entails use of a number of concepts, not all of which are readily used in census enumeration procedures.

Nevertheless, altogether about 5 percent of the civilian labor force on Guam in 1980 was unemployed. Less than 6 percent of Chamorros were unemployed, while 4 percent of the Filipinos and 5 percent of the Whites were in this category.

Table 8.17. Ethnicity by Labor Force Participation: 1980

Chamorro Not All

All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Fili‑ Specif Ot‑

Labor Force Participation Person Total Full Part pino White or NR hers

Total 16 yrs and over. 66773 26542 25292 1250 15230 13780 5111 6110

In the labor force......... 44484 14541 13851 690 10741 11170 4206 3826

Percent.............. 66.6 54.8 54.8 55.2 70.5 81.1 82.3 62.6

Armed Forces........... 10125 247 231 16 801 6610 2310 157

Percent............. 22.8 1.7 1.7 2.3 7.5 59.2 54.9 4.1

Civilian Labor Force... 34359 14294 13620 674 9940 4560 1896 3669

Employed.............. 32692 13498 12878 620 9506 4316 1835 3537

At work 35+ hrs...... 27346 11410 10934 476 8098 3438 1537 2863

At work part‑time.... 4415 1715 1593 122 1117 752 261 570

Percent............ 13.9 13.1 12.7 20.4 12.1 17.9 14.5 16.6

Unemployed............ 1667 796 742 54 434 244 61 132

Percent............ 4.9 5.6 5.4 8.0 4.4 5.4 3.2 3.6

Not in Labor Force......... 22289 12001 11441 560 4489 2610 905 2284

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A 1980, Table 38.

Of the 32,692 employed persons in the civilian labor force on Guam in 1980, 13,498 (41 percent) were Chamorro. Another 9,505 (29 percent) were Filipino, about 19 percent were either a White ethnic group or not reported (and assumed to be White), and about 11 percent were other ethnic groups.

Industry. Besides "subsistence" with only 14 persons, there were 11 major industry categories in the 1980 census (Table 8.18 and Figure 8.4). For the whole population of Guam, retail trade was the largest category with about 1 in 5 persons in that industry. Almost the same number worked in professional and related activities (such as doctors and nurses, teachers and teacher's aides). Slightly fewer worked in public administration.

The distribution for the ethnic groups differed significantly depending on the group. For example, more than 1 in every 4 Chamorros was in public administration (compared to less than 1 in 5 for the general population.) Also, Chamorros were in professional and related activities in slightly greater proportions than the general population, but it is important to remember here that this category included persons of all different occupations and skill levels; that is, persons who were teachers' aides at schools or nurses' aides at a hospital or clinic were included here with doctors, teachers, and lawyers. Although 20 percent of Guam's population worked in retail trade, this was true for only 13 percent of the Chamorros (although 22 percent of the part‑Chamorros were in retail trade compared to only 13 percent of the full‑Chamorros). Also, although only 1 in 10 of Guam's employed workers were in transportation, communication, and other utilities, 1 in 7 of the Chamorros were doing these activities. The percentage of Chamorros in construction was slightly more than half of the total population, and only 3 percent of Chamorros were in entertainment and personal industry activities compared to more than 6 percent of the total population.

The characteristics for Filipinos were very different. More than 1 in every 4 Filipinos was involved in some aspect of retail trade in 1980. The second largest industry category for Filipinos was construction, with almost 1 in every 6 Filipinos involved in this category (compared to about 1 in 20 for Chamorros). Also, more than 1 in 10 employed Filipinos were in entertainment and personal activities. Much smaller proportions of Filipinos than either Chamorros or the general population were in professional and related activities, and public administration.

Figure 8.4 Ethnicity by Industry: 1980

The activities of Whites as defined by single or multiple European ancestry and other single ethnic responses were much more restricted by category. Almost exactly 1 in every 3 Whites was in professional or related activities; another 1 in 6 were in retail trade, and about an equal number were in public administration. Hence, about 2 out of every 3 White workers were in one of these three industry categories. Consequently, few Whites worked in other industries. Only 4 percent of Whites worked in construction compared to 9 percent of Guam's population, and 8 percent worked in transportation, communication, and other utilities.

Table 8.18. Ethnicity by Industry: 1980

Chamorro Not All

All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Fili‑ Specif Ot‑

Industry Person Total Full Part pino White or NR hers

Employed persons....... 32692 13498 12878 620 9506 4316 1835 3537

Percent.............. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Agricul., forest., fishing. .9 .7 .8 .3 1.1 .6 .9 1.0

Construction, mining....... 9.3 5.4 5.4 5.0 16.1 3.7 5.8 14.8

Manufacturing.............. 4.9 4.1 4.1 4.2 6.7 4.4 5.6 3.3

Transport, commun, utility. 10.2 14.5 14.7 11.0 6.1 7.6 10.2 7.7

Wholesale trade............ 2.3 1.8 1.7 3.4 2.5 2.7 2.5 3.4

Retail trade............... 20.0 13.4 12.9 22.1 26.4 16.9 17.5 33.6

Finance, insurance......... 4.8 4.8 4.7 7.1 4.7 5.9 4.4 3.7

Business and repair serv... 3.6 3.1 3.1 4.2 3.8 3.4 3.7 5.3

Entertainment, personal.... 6.4 2.9 2.8 6.1 10.5 5.3 5.7 10.5

Professional and related... 19.6 21.8 22.1 16.3 11.9 33.3 28.9 10.3

Public administration...... 17.9 27.3 27.6 20.3 10.3 16.2 14.8 6.3

Primarily subsistence...... .0 .1 .1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 .1

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A 1980, Table 43

In Table 8.19 we have disaggregated the ethnic data a little more to show the distribution for Japanese, Koreans, and Palauans. Of the 377 Palauans employed in 1980, 27 percent were in retail trade, 18 percent were doing entertainment and other personal activities, 13 percent were in transportation, communications and other utilities, and 11 percent were doing professional and related activities. Only 8 percent were in public administration.

The 855 Koreans had a very different distribution. More than 1 in every 3 Koreans were in construction in 1980, the largest percentage of any of the selected ethnic groups, and more than twice the percentage of the Filipinos. Another 31 percent of the Koreans were in retail trade, a percentage second only to the Japanese (at 37 percent). With 2 out of every 3 Koreans in either construction or retail trade, only small numbers were doing other types of industrial activities. About 9 percent of the Koreans were in business and repair services (also more than any other group). If Koreans are representative of Asian immigrants, we can expect the make up of their part of the labor force to be somewhat different from the other groups.

As noted previously, 37 percent of employed Japanese were working in retail trade in 1980. Another 17 percent were in entertainment and personal services, and 14 percent were in transportation, communication, and other utilities. As with Koreans and Palauans, the numbers of Japanese in the labor force were still comparatively small, and further immigration may produce a different distribution of activities.

Table 8.19. Ethnicity by Percent Industry: 1980

Asian

All Cham‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Palau‑

Industry Person orro Total Japan Korea Flpno White an

Employed persons....... 32692 13498 12754 927 855 9506 4316 377

Percent............. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Agricul., forest., fishing. .9 .7 1.0 .4 1.1 1.1 .6 .5

Construction, mining....... 9.3 5.4 15.9 6.5 36.1 16.1 3.7 7.4

Manufacturing.............. 4.9 4.1 5.8 1.6 1.9 6.7 4.4 4.0

Transport, commun, utility. 10.2 14.5 6.5 14.1 2.7 6.1 7.6 13.3

Wholesale trade............ 2.3 1.8 2.7 3.7 1.8 2.5 2.7 4.5

Retail trade............... 20.0 13.4 28.5 37.0 31.0 26.4 16.9 27.1

Finance, insurance......... 4.8 4.8 4.6 4.1 2.0 4.7 5.9 2.4

Business and repair serv... 3.6 3.1 4.2 4.9 9.0 3.8 3.4 4.5

Entertainment, personal.... 6.4 2.9 10.3 16.6 7.7 10.5 5.3 17.8

Professional and related... 19.6 21.8 11.3 7.2 4.7 11.9 33.3 10.6

Public administration...... 17.9 27.3 9.1 3.8 2.1 10.3 16.2 8.0

Primarily subsistence...... .0 .1 .0 .1 0.0 .0 0.0 0.0

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A 1980, Table 43.

Once again, 41 percent of employed persons were Chamorro, 39 percent were Asian, and about 13 percent were "White". There was considerable variation from this pattern for individual industries. For example, Chamorros constituted 59 percent of all persons in transportation, communication, and utilities, but only 19 percent of those in entertainment and personal services, 24 percent of those in construction, and 28 percent of persons in retail trade. On the other hand, Asians were 67 percent of all persons in construction, 62 percent of those in entertainment and personal services, and 56 percent of those in retail trade. (Filipinos were more than half of all persons in construction and almost half of those in entertainment and personal services.) Whites had proportionally more than their average in professional and related activities (22 percent), finance, insurance and real estate (16 percent), and wholesale trade (also 16 percent). Koreans constituted 10 percent of all persons in construction, and 6 percent of those in business and repair services; Japanese were 7 percent of all persons in entertainment and personal services and 5 percent of those in retail trade, while Palauans were 3 percent of the entertainment and personal services industry.

There were more Filipinos employed in manufacturing than any other ethnic group, with 40 percent. The second largest group in this industry was Chamorro, making up 35 percent, followed by Whites with 12 percent, while all others contributed smaller amounts. In the wholesale trade industry, Chamorros and Filipinos were present in about equal amounts ( 31 percent each), while Whites were 16 percent. The retail trade industry was dominated by Filipinos (38 percent), Chamorros (28 percent), and Whites (11 percent).

Table 8.20. Percent Ethnicity by Industry: 1980

Asian

All Cham‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Palau‑

Industry Person orro Total Japan Korea Flpno White an

Employed persons....... 100.0 41.3 39.0 2.8 2.6 29.1 13.2 1.2

Agricul., forest., fishing. 100.0 35.2 47.0 1.4 3.2 37.4 9.6 .7

Construction, mining....... 100.0 23.8 66.7 2.0 10.1 50.3 5.2 .9

Manufacturing.............. 100.0 34.7 46.1 .9 1.0 39.8 11.8 .9

Transport, commun, utility. 100.0 58.9 24.8 3.9 .7 17.4 9.9 1.5

Wholesale trade............ 100.0 31.4 45.1 4.5 2.0 30.9 15.5 2.3

Retail trade............... 100.0 27.5 55.6 5.2 4.0 38.3 11.1 1.6

Finance, insurance......... 100.0 41.8 37.4 2.4 1.1 28.4 16.3 .6

Business and repair serv... 100.0 35.9 45.3 3.8 6.5 30.3 12.4 1.4

Entertainment, personal.... 100.0 18.9 62.3 7.3 3.1 47.6 10.9 3.2

Professional and related... 100.0 46.0 22.5 1.0 .6 17.6 22.4 .6

Public administration...... 100.0 62.9 19.9 .6 .3 16.7 11.9 .5

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A 1980, Table 43.

We have briefly described characteristics for the three major groups on Guam in 1980. Since 1980 was the first time that a decennial census collected ethnicity data for Guam, these data are only a first step in analyzing the characteristics of the population.

LANGUAGE SPOKEN AT HOME AND ABILITY TO SPEAK ENGLISH

About 36 percent of the population 5 years and over on Guam in 1980 spoke only English at home (Table 8.21). Except for Whites, of course, none of the other large ethnic groups spoke English in more than half of their homes. Only 23 percent of Chamorros spoke English at home, compared to 19 percent of the Filipinos, 23 percent of the Japanese, 15 percent of the Palauans, and 7 percent of the Koreans. Slightly more than half of the part‑Chamorros spoke English at home, probably due to the interracial make‑up of these marriages, while only 1 in 5 of the full‑Chamorros spoke English at home.

Of the 64 percent of the population 5 years and over who did not speak English at home, about 4 in 10 spoke another language more frequently than English. The published 1980 census tabulations did not specify which language was spoken if English was not spoken, so it is not possible to tell whether Chamorros were speaking Chamorro, Filipinos speaking a language from the Philippines, etc., but certain assumptions can be made.

Less than 1 percent of Guam's population did not speak English at all, but more than 1 percent of the Filipinos spoke no English, and more than 3 percent of the Japanese and 4 percent of the Koreans fell into this category.

Although 28 percent of the population spoke English more frequently than the other language, more Chamorros were in this category (especially part‑Chamorros at 53 percent), while fewer Japanese (23 percent), Palauans

(20 percent), Filipinos (18 percent), and Koreans (12 percent) were in this category. On the other hand, more than half of the Koreans, and almost half of the Filipinos, Japanese, and Palauans spoke another language at home more often than English.

Table 8.21. Ethnicity by Language and Ability to Speak English: 1980

Chamorro

All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

per‑ Sin‑ Mult‑ Fili‑ Japan Kor‑ Pa‑

Language and Ability sons Total gle ple pino ‑ese ean lauan

Total 5 yrs and over.. 92977 41538 38694 2844 19971 1667 1694 1172

Percent............ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Speaks only English........ 35.7 23.1 21.1 50.5 19.4 23.3 7.3 15.3

Speaks other language...... 59795 31925 30516 1409 16103 1278 1571 993

Percent............ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

English more frequently.. 27.9 33.0 32.1 52.7 17.7 23.2 12.2 20.0

Both equally often....... 31.3 35.2 35.4 29.8 32.9 25.3 21.1 30.8

Other language more often 40.1 31.5 32.1 17.5 48.9 48.4 62.8 48.6

Doesn't speak English.... .7 .4 .4 0.0 1.5 3.1 3.8 .5

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 31.

There was an inverse relationship between English language speaking at home and age; that is, the older the person, the less likely he or she was to speak English at home (Table 8.22, Figures 8.5 and 8.6). While persons over 65 constituted 3 percent of the population, for example, they were less than 1 percent of persons speaking English. On the other hand, 23 percent of the children 5 to 9 spoke English at home, compared to their 14 percent of the population.

The 1980 census did show that the Chamorro language was still strong. Altogether 32,034 persons 5 years and over were recorded as speaking Chamorro at home compared to the 33,182 speaking English ‑ about equal numbers. Although smaller proportions than their 5 to 9 year olds spoke Chamorro (10 percent of all Chamorro speakers compared to 14 percent of the population of that age), there was a slightly larger proportion of 10 to 14 year Chamorro speakers than in the total population. These numbers are only inferential, but do give the impression that Chamorro is still spoken in most Chamorro homes.

The distribution of Philippines language speakers was much more concentrated at older ages, because of the immigration of these persons at older ages.

Figure 8.5 Speak Only English at Home by Age: 1980

(Percent)

Figure 8.6 Speak Only Chamorro at Home by Age: 1980

(Percent)

Table 8.22. Language Spoken at Home by Age: 1980

Non‑English Language

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All English Cham‑ Phlppn All

Age Group Persons Only Total orro langs Others

Total......... 92,977 33,182 59,795 32,034 15,487 12,274

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

5 to 9 yrs...... 13.6 22.8 8.5 10.4 4.9 8.0

10 to 14 yrs.... 12.2 16.3 9.9 12.8 6.0 7.5

15 to 19 yrs.... 11.8 12.3 11.5 14.0 7.6 10.1

20 to 24 yrs.... 11.9 14.0 10.8 10.4 7.7 15.8

25 to 29 yrs.... 11.1 10.5 11.4 10.0 12.1 14.2

30 to 34 yrs.... 10.0 8.8 10.7 8.7 12.7 13.2

35 to 44 yrs.... 12.1 8.8 14.0 11.7 17.1 16.1

45 to 54 yrs.... 8.8 3.9 11.5 10.3 16.0 9.1

55 to 59 yrs.... 3.1 1.2 4.2 3.6 6.9 2.5

60 to 64 yrs.... 2.1 .7 2.8 2.8 4.0 1.5

65 yrs or more.. 3.2 .7 4.6 5.3 5.2 2.0

_______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

Table 8.23 shows the percentages of speakers of languages at home by age. Once again, while 36 percent of the population 5 years and over spoke only English at home, 64 percent spoke another language; Chamorro was spoken by 34 percent of the total, Philippines languages by 17 percent, and 13 percent spoke other languages. Although 60 percent of the 5 to 9 year olds spoke English at home, this was not true for any of the other age groups. In fact, as was seen in Table 8.22, the older the age group, the less likely they were to speak English at home.

Although about 1 in 3 persons on Guam spoke Chamorro in 1980 (Figure 8.7), more than 4 in 10 of the 15 to 19 year olds were in this category, as were about 4 in 10 of persons 45 to 64 and more than half of those over 65 years old.

Table 8.23. Percent Language Spoken at Home by Age: 1980

Non‑English Language

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All English Cham‑ Phlppn All

Age Group Persons Only Total orro langs Others

Total......... 100.0 35.7 64.3 34.5 16.7 13.2

5 to 9 yrs...... 100.0 59.9 40.1 26.4 6.0 7.7

10 to 14 yrs.... 100.0 47.6 52.4 36.0 8.2 8.2

15 to 19 yrs.... 100.0 37.3 62.7 40.8 10.7 11.2

20 to 24 yrs.... 100.0 41.9 58.1 29.9 10.7 17.5

25 to 29 yrs.... 100.0 33.8 66.2 31.2 18.2 16.9

30 to 34 yrs.... 100.0 31.3 68.7 30.1 21.2 17.4

35 to 44 yrs.... 100.0 25.8 74.2 33.3 23.4 17.5

45 to 54 yrs.... 100.0 15.7 84.3 40.3 30.3 13.6

55 to 59 yrs.... 100.0 13.7 86.3 39.4 36.4 10.4

60 to 64 yrs.... 100.0 12.3 87.7 46.0 31.9 9.8

65 yrs or more.. 100.0 8.1 91.9 56.6 26.9 8.4

_______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

Figure 8.7 Chamorro Spoken at Home by Age: 1980

(Percent)

SUMMARY

Chamorros continued to be the largest single ethnic group on Guam in 1980 (45.1 percent of the total population), though at the lowest levels recorded in any census this century. Whites were second in numbers here (25.4 percent), Filipinos third (21.2 percent). The proportions of Whites and Filipinos here is increasing, that of Chamorros is decreasing. Fully 78 percent of full Chamorros were born on Guam, as were 61 percent of part Chamorros. The median age of Chamorros (18.2 years) was the lowest of any ethnic group; that of the Filipinos (27.9 years) was highest. Almost 60 percent of part Chamorros were less than 15 years of age, as were 40 percent of full Chamorros. Whites were primarily 20 to 44 years of age, Filipinos were 35 to 44 years.

About 2 out of 3 of those 16 years and older were in the labor force; however, only 55 percent of Chamorros were in the labor force, compared to 70 percent of Filipinos and 81 percent of Whites. This was partly due to small numbers of Chamorros in the Armed Forces or working only part time. Those in the "Other" ethnic groups represented only 9 percent of the population but 63 percent were in the labor force. By industry, Chamorros were mostly in the fields of public administration or professional and related services, Filipinos in retail trade or construction and mining, Whites were in professional and related services or retail trade, and others were in retail trade or construction and mining.

Of the population 5 years and older, 36 percent spoke only English at home; except for Whites, no other group spoke only English in more than half of the homes. Less than 1 percent spoke no English at all. Older persons were less likely than younger ones to speak English at home.

Guam is becoming increasingly multi‑ethnic and there is some evidence that multi‑lingualism will continue for some time based on the current age structure of the population and the likelihood for continued immigration from Asia, the Pacific Islands, and the United States. The Census data give some general information about the ethnic distribution of the population in 1980; unfortunately since 1970 data were not available, many comparison were not possible. After the 1990 census, a better set of trends will be developed to help planners and policy makers determine the best programs for Guam's future.

CHAPTER 9

EDUCATION

Guam has been an unincorporated Territory of the United States since 1898. Therefore, its population has had a long term exposure to the United States system of education. In fact, when the island schools were first set up, both curriculum content and sequence, and the patterns of organization common to the state of California were used as models. The public schools, Guam Community College, and University of Guam are all accredited by the Western Association of Schools and Colleges (WASC), which also accredits schools in California, Hawaii, and other Western states.

Educational statistics from decennial censuses give snapshots of the school enrollment and educational attainment. The census collects two sets of characteristics for assessing the educational status of a population: level of school enrollment and level of educational attainment for adults no longer in school. These data can be used in conjunction with data from the Department of Education and other sources to obtain information about the size and characteristics about the educated and uneducated populations. Although statistical data are collected annually by the Department of Education in order to obtain adequate information about school enrollment and to assess needs for special programs in bilingual education and special education, the census allows more in‑depth analysis of various characteristics of the school population, such as ethnicity, birthplace, and language spoken at home.

Also, the census collects data on educational attainment. These data can be used to assess the relationship between educational attainment and participation in the labor force, occupation and industry, income and poverty, and other characteristics.

Three questions, numbers 7, 8 and 9, on the 1980 census collected information on school enrollment and educational attainment. Data were also collected on literacy in question 17, and vocational training in questions 20a and 20b.

SCHOOL ENROLLMENT

The data on school enrollment were derived from answers to questions 7 and 8. Persons were classified as enrolled in school if they reported attending a "regular" school or college at any time between February 1, 1980 and the time of enumeration. Regular schooling was defined as pre‑kindergarten, kindergarten, elementary school, and schooling which led to a high school diploma or college degree. Schooling in trade or business schools, company training, or schooling obtained through a tutor was to be reported only if the course credits obtained were regarded as transferable to a regular elementary school, high school, or college. Children were included as enrolled in pre‑kindergarten only if the school included instruction as an important and integral phase of its program. Children enrolled in "Head Start" programs, or similar programs sponsored by local agencies to provide pre‑primary education to young children, were included as enrolled in school. Persons who had been enrolled in a regular school since February 1, 1980, but who had not actually attended, for example, because of illness, were counted as enrolled in school. Schooling which was generally regarded as not "regular" included that given in a pre‑kindergarten which simply provided custodial day care; in specialized vocational, trade, or, business schools; in on‑the‑job training; and through correspondence courses.